Home

Avaya Configuring DLSw Services User's Manual

1. go E OV m z SDLC ELI 3174 Front end processer E Lo Tf E 3174 SDLC LLC2 jqeeeewe see sete see e see es gt 2 a Single switch DLSw network z FORE 3174 1 SDLC secondary Host router l d Z 3174 w SDLC IS ip gt OV y E E backbone O 3174 Front end processer oe l 3174 SDLC TCP IP or LLC2 LLC2 4 gt 4 b b Dual switch DLSw network DLS0024A Figure 1 13 Secondary SDLC Routers in a Single Switch and b Dual Switch DLSw Networks 1 26 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Data Link Switching Overview Combining Primary and Secondary SDLC Using primary and secondary SDLC services a network can transport existing SDLC traffic over a router based topology that e Enables existing SDLC traffic to use a h
2. DLSw sends LLC traffic from Router token ring to with BAN2 frame relay Fata termination network DLS0063A Figure 1 17 Sample Network Using BAN2 Termination QLLC Support QLLC provides reliable transport for SNA devices connected over an X 25 network using switched virtual circuits SVCs This support enables QLLC attached devices to connect to a non X 25 backbone and allows non QLLC devices to connect to an X 25 network Both single and dual switch DLSw networks can operate over X 25 links using QLLC For detailed information about configuring QLLC prior to adding DLSw single and dual switch services see Configuring X 25 Services 1 34 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Data Link Switching Overview DLSw APPN Boundary Function The DLSw APPN boundary function BF allows DLSw to provide remote communications through an IP backbone and provide access over this backbone from enterprise level applications using an APPN network The DLSw APPN boundary function is implemented within a central APPN network node The BF accepts traditional PU 2 0 or PU 2 1 traffic supported by DLSw and routes it over APPN to the appropriate partner typically a mainframe based application DLSw APPN Network Configurations The DLSw APPN boundary function can reside wherever your APPN backbone network is located In Figure 1 18 for example the DLS
3. Router B returns a REACHACK acknowledgment frame to router A The terminal then sends a NULL XID P frame to router B Router B forwards an LLC XIDFRAME NULL to router A Router A sends a NULL XID P to the host 9 04 25 95 22 43 01 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 17 LLC XID frame received The host returns a NULL XID F frame to router A router A forwards an XIDFRAME NULL packet to router B Router B sends a NULL XID F to the terminal 10 04 25 95 22 43 01 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 45 SSP XID frame rcvd in LLC conn state flag 30927f 70 4 201 The terminal sends a NULL T2 P frame to router B and router B generates and sends an XIDFRAME T2 to router A Router A sends an XID T2 P to the host 11 04 25 95 22 43 01 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 17 LLC XID frame received 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Troubleshooting DLSw Networks The host computer generates an SABME frame and sends it to router A Router A returns UA and receiver not ready RNR frames back to the host Router A then contacts router B and router B sends the SABME contact frame to the terminal 12 04 25 95 22 43 01 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 45 SSP contact frame rcvd in LLC conn state flag 30927f70 4 201 The terminal returns an acknowledgment UA packet to router B Router B informs router A that the contact is accepted A state change occurs 13 04 25 95 22 43 01 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 16 Sta
4. ccesceeceeeseneeeeeeeeesetaeeeeeeeeees A 90 Add Queue FC cess tases phccadoncs etareceeeonartaentnnieapacsmanianatasatenoamiads A 92 DLS Priority Outbound Filters Window EEE E E A 94 Sample DLSw LLC2 Network Connection Sequence RFC 1434 C 9 Sample DLSw SDLC Network Connection Sequence scee C 12 Data Flow for Routers Running RFC 1434 PU 2 0 over LLC C 32 Data Flow for Routers Running RFC 1434 PU 2 1 over LLC C 33 Data Flow for Routers Running RFC 1795 c ccssseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeneeeeees C 34 Data Flow for Routers Running DLSw Version 2 0 nesses C 35 Data Flow for Routers Running DLSw Version 2 0 and RFC 1795 Peer on RRS 1795 ROUT suiriri tiant a E C 36 Data Flow for Routers Running DLSw Version 2 0 and REC 1795 Peer on Version 2 0 ROU ciciicinccssnattcsnsrcnccsiioriennnesrreaeniaewannnines C 37 Exchange Between Two Routers Running DLSw Version 2 0 UDP or Unknown Peer on One Router eeceecseeeneeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeees C 38 Exchange Between a Router Running DLSw Version 2 0 and One Running RFC 1795 Peer on RFC 1795 Router 0006 C 39 Exchange Between Two Routers Running DLSw Version 2 0 Unknown Peer in Fallback Mode on One Router essees C 40 Exchange Between Two Routers Running DLSw Version 2 0 TCP Peer Configured as Remote Router in Fallback Mode OTE One FEN eiiaoe an E haadenbadecviateed C 41 Primary to Secondary SDLC Data Flow Using Single
5. SNA server T OO 3274 I 0 Router B Router A oy L CJ innit a Ea NetBIOS server PC DLS0031A Figure 4 1 DLSw Single Switch Network Example 4 2 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services To configure single switch DLSw services on the router you define e DLSw basic global parameters e DLSw advanced global parameters optional Site Manager only e DLSw SAP table entries optional Using the BCC To configure single switch DLSw services navigate to the dlsw global prompt for example box dlsw and enter virtual ring lt ring_ia gt rfc type lt rfc_type gt virtual ring mtu lt mtu gt max slot sessions lt max_si ot gt ring_id is the standard ring number that SRB uses to identify traffic that DLSw places on the SRB LAN The values are 0x001 to OxFFF rfc_type is the RFC implementation to run on the router The values are rfc1434 rfc1795 v2Ounicast or rfc2166 The default is rfc1434 mtu is the MTU size for frames sent from local LAN attached systems to systems on remote LANS The value is any number of bytes equal to or greater than 1 The default is 1500 max_slotis the maximum number of LLC2 sessions that a given slot in the router can support for DLSw requirements The default is 200 For example the following commands specify a virtual ring ID of 0x001 rfc type 1434 virtual ring mtu of
6. A 28 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Cancel OK Values Help DLSw Mode PRIMARY Link Station Address hex PU Name PU Type IDBLOCK 3 hex digits IDNUM 5 hex digits Xid Format Source Virtual MAC Chex Source Virtual SAP hex Destination MAC hex Figure A 7 Local Device Configuration Window 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 29 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID DLSw Mode Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Local Devices gt Add Primary Primary Secondary PP Secondary MP Negotiable Specifies the type of link station you are configuring on this node A primary link station controls a data link issues commands polls secondary stations and initiates error recovery procedures Only one link station on an SDLC line can be the primary station all other stations on the line must be secondary When configured as a primary SDLC link station the router communicates with downstream PU 2 0 PU 2 1 and PU 4 nodes multipoint configurations only A secondary link station receives commands and responds to primary link station polls When configured as a secondary SDLC link station the router emulates a PU 2 0 or PU 4 node multipoint configurations only When configured as a negotiable SDLC link station the
7. SNA Bay Networks router processor Figure 1 6 LLC2 backbone Bay Networks router Frame relay only Logical connection DLS0003A Nortel Networks Adjacent Single Switch Routers QLLC to LLC2 Conversion Using single switch conversion enables the router to convert incoming QLLC traffic received over an X 25 network into the appropriate format for forwarding to an attached LAN or frame relay network The conversion does not require an intervening wide area network WAN 308622 14 00 Rev 00 1 15 Configuring DLSw Services Dual Switch Services DLSw dual switch services allow SNA and NetBIOS traffic to share a multiprotocol backbone The DLSw standard specifies TCP IP as the standard transport mechanism for SNA and NetBIOS across an internetwork DLSw dual switch services uses TCP IP between routers unlike adjacent single switch routers using LLC2 DLSw dual switch services provide e IP routing permitting delivery over any available path e TCP services providing reliable data delivery reduced network overhead and flow control mechanisms to manage traffic Packets are carried to an attached Nortel Networks DLSw node where the data is translated into SSP datagrams The data is then routed over the multiprotocol backbone to a remote Nortel Networks DLSw node using an IP routing protocol When the SSP datagram reaches the remote Nortel Network
8. The TCP window size is too large Decrease the TCP Window Size parameter setting and check performance 308622 14 00 Rev 00 C 19 Configuring DLSw Services Common DLSw Nonproblems The DLSw log often contains debug event messages that report conditions about proper network activity These debug messages are not errors and should not be treated or reported for further action The DLSw nonproblems include e Unexpected protocol action TCP open error 29 e DLSw peers not reachable due to lack of a route e Traffic going over SRB instead of DLSw path e Resetting dynamic window algorithm e Expecting SNRM prior to DLSw connection to host e Slow performance due to pacing Unexpected Protocol Action An unexpected protocol action occurred multiple times This condition indicates that frames are being transmitted between two DLSw routers while an LLC Disconnect Pending frame is processing This condition clears itself and the DLSw disconnect sequence finishes normally The following sample log entries show this condition 36 04 25 95 22 43 17 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 16 State change in llc_disc_ind conn 30927f 70 old state 1 new state 11 38 04 25 95 22 43 17 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 36 Unexpected protocol action state 11 t 10 conn 30927 70 39 04 25 95 22 43 17 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 0 The previous event on slot 1 repeated 7 time s Code 36 40
9. 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 25 Configuring DLSw Services DLSw Advanced Interface Configuration Parameters The DLSw Interface Configuration window Figure A 6 contains two parameters that let you enable or disable a DLSw interface for a specific circuit i aaa S51 11c2 l Delete Apply Values Help T Ki Enable ENABLE DLSw Mode PRIMARY Figure A 6 DLSw Interface Configuration Window A 26 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Enable Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Advanced gt Interfaces Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables data link switching over this interface e Enable Initializes the DLSw interface that you added to a physical circuit Also use the Enable setting to reinitialize an existing DLSw interface disabled earlier The state of the interface depends on the up down state of the associated circuit and slot e Disable Switches a DLSw interface from the enabled up state to the disabled down state Select Enable if you previously set this parameter to Disable and now want to reenable data link switching over this interface Select Disable only if you want to disable data link switching over this interface This cancels all active LLC2 sessions currently supported by the interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 2 1 2 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A
10. Common DLSw Problems and Nonproblems This section describes common problems and nonproblems or behaviors associated with DLSw Common DLSw Problems Table C 4 describes common problems with DLSw LLC and SDLC and lists causes and actions Table C 5 Common DLSw Problems Problem Possible Cause Action Solution DLSw TCP connections do Improper DLS Slot Table Each slot running DLSw not come up configuration no IP address requires a unique IP configured on slot address assigned to each DLSw slot DLSw TCP connections No peer configured Add a peer and its IP partially come up address to the peer table DLSw connections do not DLS configured on wrong Configure DLS on an LLC or come up slot SDLC interface Single switch sessions do Both interfaces not Configure two interfaces for not establish configured single switch operation continued 308622 14 00 Rev 00 C 17 Configuring DLSw Services Table C 5 Common DLSw Problems continued Problem Possible Cause Action Solution Frame rejects cause session failures End station MAXIN parameter smaller than wiLiclnterface Tw MTU received is too large for configuration T1 timer too short for long WAN delays Verify the configuration of the end station and check the configured LLC window sizes Increase the wfLicInterfaceMaxMtu variable to larger than the possible data size Increase the wiLicinterfa
11. Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Backup Config Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table No Yes No Enables the parameters that allow you to configure a backup peer Click on Values and select Yes or No 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 11 Backup IP Address Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table 0 0 0 0 Any valid 32 bit IP address of the form network host using dotted decimal notation Specifies the IP address of a backup DLSw peer and adds the peer to the DLSw backup peer IP table A backup peer receives all DLSw related broadcast frames for a given router or network processor if the primary peer router is unavailable or cannot be reached over a TCP connection Enter the IP address of the backup peer 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 12 Backup Peer Type Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table V20 Unicast Unknown RFC1795 V20 Unicast TCP V20 Unicast Unknown V20 Unicast UDP RFC2166 Multicast Specifies the type of DLSw backup peer Accept the default V20 Unicast Unknown or select a different option 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 18 A 48 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID
12. LLC 2 lt LLC2 or SDLC gt Logical connection DLS0002A Nortel Networks Single Switch Router Single switch services support any media to media conversion for example SDLC to QLLC The following types of single switch conversion are described in detail e FRAD operation e SDLC to LLC2 conversion e QLLC to LLC2 conversion FRAD Operation Single switch services enable a Nortel Networks router to function as a Frame Relay Access Device FRAD SNA devices are typically connected over a LAN or SDLC connection to the router providing local termination The router first connects to the frame relay or other wide area network and then to an SNA processor using the Boundary Network Node BNN or the Boundary Access Node BAN BNN is the RFC 1490 standard For more information on BNN and BAN see Frame Relay Support on page 1 28 308622 14 00 Rev 00 NetBIOS server Data Link Switching Overview SDLC to LLC2 Conversion Using single switch conversion enables the router to convert incoming SDLC traffic into the appropriate format for forwarding to an attached LAN or frame relay network The conversion does not require an intervening WAN Figure 1 6 illustrates a network using adjacent routers each performing single switch conversion Between single switch routers the LLC2 protocol is used Frame relay
13. Shows DLSw connections that match the specified local IP address 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Monitoring DLSw Using the BCC show Commands The output for show disw connections includes the following information Circuits Status Destination MAC Source MAC Remote IP local IP DSAP SSAP TX RX IFrames TX RX RNRs IDBLK IDNUM show disw global Circuit name assigned to the interface State of the connection connected disconnected Destination and source MAC addresses Remote IP and local IP addresses Destination SAP address and Source SAP address Information frames Receiver Not Ready PDUs Notifies the destination LLC that the originating LLC is busy Block number and ID number Numbers must match the host s IDBLOCK and IDNUM values The show disw global command displays the values for the DLSw global parameters This command supports the following subcommand options basic Shows basic global information about DLSw advanced Shows advanced global information about DLSw This command does not use command filters or arguments 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring DLSw Services The output for show disw global basic includes the following information State Virtual Ring ID RFC Type Unconfigured Peers State of the DLSw service up down init initializing disabled or absent The standard ring number that SRB uses to identify traffic that is placed on the SRB LAN by DLS
14. 08 1 38 Waite Lew Reservations cccsiiti dance isantcntarnesinciiasniedaisnendecesaaaniedaieccomce 1 41 DLSw Capable Routers on an IP Backbone ccsecceceeesteeeeeeesnneeeeeens 2 3 Sample DLSw and SRB Network T aora e E 2 4 DLSw and Source Route Bridging on SRB Circuits ceceeeeeeeees 2 6 DLSw and Transparent Bridging on Ethernet 802 3 Circuits 06 2 7 Tanslalion Bridge SGRVICOS riesana er Aa ar eieaa 2 8 308622 14 00 Rev 00 xiii Xiv Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 3 1 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure A 1 Figure A 2 Figure A 3 Figure A 4 Figure A 5 Figure A 6 Figure A 7 Figure A 8 Figure A 9 Figure A 10 Figure A 11 Figure A 12 Figure A 13 Figure A 14 Figure A 15 Figure A 16 Figure A 17 Figure A 18 Figure A 19 Figure A 20 Figure A 21 Figure A 22 Figure A 23 Figure A 24 Figure A 25 Figure A 26 Independent DLSw Translation Bridge Network sessen 2 9 DLSw Services in Parallel with a Source Routing Bridge 0 2 10 Weighed DGQUBUIING sccccecssscctsrsativcerdemivenecemiuicoutenvededeminicciummtenionay 2 19 DLSw Configuration Hierarchy aa cess ro crstisaeencnstndunrnrinaseeinuirientinmribeaiadeen 3 3 DLSw Single Switch Network Example cccceceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeteeesenes 4 2 Sample Network with SAP Table Definitions c ccesceeeeeeeesteeeeeneees 4 5 DLSw
15. 2 20 308622 14 00 Rev 00 DLSw Implementation Notes Backup Peers You use the backup peer feature if you cannot establish a TCP connection to the primary peer The TCP connection to the backup peer lasts as long as needed or until the connection time expires and the connection ends DLSw will break a backup connection if no primary connections are in effect or if they are idle that is if no data has passed You can configure backup peers for the following DLSw versions RFC 1434 RFC 1795 DLSw Version 2 0 unicast or RFC 2166 multicast You select a version using the DLSw RFC Version parameter from the DLSw Basic Global Parameters window For instructions on using this parameter see Appendix A Site Manager Parameters If you are using Site Manager to configure backup peers you select Yes at the Backup Config parameter in the DLSw Multicast Configuration window or the DLSw Peer Configuration window If you are using the BCC set the backup peer parameter to yes Now you can edit the rest of the backup peer parameters You use the Backup Peer Type parameter to specify a TCP connection for the backup peer The valid values are e RFC 1795 Send the request for connection over TCP only e V2 0 Unicast TCP Send the request for connection over TCP only e V2 0 Unicast Unknown Send the request for connection over UDP the backup peer can fall back to RFC 1795 mode e V2 0 Unicast UDP Send the req
16. 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Table C 11 Troubleshooting DLSw Networks LLC Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Action Solution Frame rejects cause session failures Table C 12 End station MAXIN parameter smaller than wiLiclnterface Tw MTU received is too large for configuration T1 timer too short for long WAN delays SDLC Troubleshooting Verify the configuration of the end station and check the configured LLC window sizes Increase the wfiLIcInterfaceMaxMtu variable to larger than the possible data size Increase the variable wfLlIcinterface TackWait setting to avoid timeouts Problem Possible Cause Action Solution DLSw configured for SDLC does not come up Incorrect configuration DLSw connection not establishing Improper cabling Check the configuration to ensure that SDLC is configured and connected Make sure that the router software image contains DLS exe LLC exe NBASE exe and SDLC exe Verify that you are using the correct cables see Verifying the WAN Cabling on page G 30 continued 308622 14 00 Rev 00 C 27 Configuring DLSw Services Table C 12 SDLC Troubleshooting continued Problem Possible Cause Action Solution SDLC does not connect to the host computer SDLC interface not active SDLC local devices not configured properly Source or destination MAC address
17. 4 Edit the parameters you want to change Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 80 5 Click on OK The Configuration Manager window opens 4 58 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services Specifying SRB or TB for DLSw over ATM Token Ring LANE When you configure DLSw over an ATM token ring LANE interface Site Manager uses the Atm Bridging Mode parameter to allow you to specify whether you want source route bridging or transparent bridging To set this parameter complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Protocols menu opens choose Protocols 2 Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose Basic Interface The DLSw Basic Interface Parameters window opens 4 Set the Atm Bridging Mode parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 9 5 Click on OK The Configuration Manager window opens Configuring MAC Address Translation The following sections describe how to configure MAC address translation using the BCC or Site Manager Using the BCC To enable MAC address translation navigate to the global dlsw prompt for example box disw and enter mac addr translation enabled For example to enable MAC address translation enter dlsw mac addr translation enabled dlsw 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 59 Configuring DLSw Services
18. Bay Networks Configuring SDLC Services 117371 B Rev 00 April 1999 Braden R L Zhang S Berson S Herzog and S Jamin Resource ReSerVation Protocol RSVP RFC 2205 September 1997 308622 14 00 Rev 00 xxiii Configuring DLSw Services You can print selected technical manuals and release notes free directly from the Internet Go to support baynetworks com library tpubs Find the product for which you need documentation Then locate the specific category and model or version for your hardware or software product Using Adobe Acrobat Reader you can open the manuals and release notes search for the sections you need and print them on most standard printers You can download Acrobat Reader free from the Adobe Systems Web site www adobe com You can purchase selected documentation sets CDs and technical publications through the collateral catalog The catalog is located on the World Wide Web at support baynetworks com catalog html and is divided into sections arranged alphabetically e The CD ROMs section lists available CDs e The Guides Books section lists books on technical topics e The Technical Manuals section lists available printed documentation sets How to Get Help If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel Networks product from a distributor or authorized reseller contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller for assistance If you purchased a Nortel
19. Data Link Switching Overview Single Switch Services DLSw single switch services enable the router to perform link level conversion while providing services to ensure session integrity Examples of single switch conversions include e SDLC to token ring e SDLC to frame relay RFC 1490 e Token ring to Ethernet e Ethernet to Bridged SNA over frame relay e QLLC to token ring Single switch configurations provide services to attached devices and networks to ensure session availability including e Local acknowledgment and termination of the LLC2 SDLC or QLLC session e 802 5 routing information field RIF caching e MAC address and NetBIOS name caching Figure 1 5 illustrates a sample network using a single Nortel Networks router The router can communicate with an IBM SNA processor or other LAN gateway Note If you configure either two token ring interfaces or ATM token ring LANE or a token ring interface and a frame relay Boundary Access Node BAN interface on a DLSw single switch the traffic between the two interfaces uses SRB not DLSw However if you enable BAN2 termination for the router see Chapter 4 for instructions the traffic between the interfaces uses DLSw 308622 14 00 Rev 00 1 13 Configuring DLSw Services server SNA processor o LLC2 Bay Networks router Ethernet Figure 1 5
20. RFC 2166 Multicast Specifies the type of this DLSw backup peer Accept the default V20 Unicast Unknown or click on the Values button and specify a different type 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 15 1 11 A 76 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Backup Max Up Time sec Configuration Manager gt DLSw gt Multicast IP Table gt Multicast IP Table 0 0 to 999999 s Specifies the maximum time in seconds that the backup peer can remain connected to the local DLSw peer When the maximum time is reached the software terminates the TCP connection if there are no active TCP sessions between the routers The software overrides the Backup Max Up Time parameter setting only if there is an active non idle TCP connection with data transferring between the routers Type a value in the range 0 to 999999 Specify 0 to disable the Backup Max Up Time parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 15 1 7 Backup Hold Down Time sec Configuration Manager gt DLSw gt Multicast IP Table gt Multicast IP Table 120 0 to 2147483647 s Specifies the time to wait in seconds after the primary peer is declared unreachable before the local router initiates a TCP connection to the backup peer The hold down time ensures that the primary peer has enough time to respond to
21. Router B 192 32 30 2 192 32 30 1 Frame relay 192 32 40 1 Frame relay 192 32 40 2 Circuitless 192 32 200 1 Z Frame relay Circuitless o 192 32 100 1 Front end SDLC E processor control unit Router B Router A Router C SAP Table SAP Table SAP Table 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x04 0x04 0x04 0x08 0x08 0x08 0x0C 0x0C 0x0C OxFO OxFO DLS0021A Figure 4 2 Sample Network with SAP Table Definitions 4 5 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring DLSw Services Adding a DLSw SAP Table Entry The following sections describe how to add a DLSw SAP table entry using the BCC or Site Manager Using the BCC To add a new SAP table entry navigate to the dlsw global prompt for example box disw and enter sap lt sap_adadr gt sap_adar is the destination SAP address associated with a communication subsystem on a remote device for example on a PC or host The values are even SAP addresses 00 to FO in hexadecimal format For example the following command adds a SAP address of 0x04 to the SAP table dlsw sap 0x04 Using Site Manager To add a new SAP table entry complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens 2 Choos
22. SOs TCP IP network DLSw capable routers Key R Ring SRB segment B Bridge DLSO009A Figure 2 1 DLSw Capable Routers on an IP Backbone For frame relay networks to use SRB you must configure the DLSw router for BAN to use source route encapsulation Figure 2 2 illustrates a sample DLSw and SRB network 308622 14 00 Rev 00 2 3 Configuring DLSw Services ie SS Front end processer 4 Local termination at DLSw interfaces only 3274 E ll fo Frame relay or other SRB network Router A LLC2 LLC2 Figure 2 2 gt 4 gt DLS0026A Sample DLSw and SRB Network For mixed topologies an end to end connection path includes an SRB anda non SRB LAN In such cases do not exceed the maximum number of SRB LAN and bridge elements allowed on the SRB LAN side of the connection path For detailed information on SRB see Configuring Bridging Services Virtual Rings Just as each physical token ring in a source routing network has an associated ring ID the DLSw network has a virtual ring ID You enter this ring ID with the IP Virtual Ring parameter The virtual ring also has an associated MTU size The Virtual Ring MTU parameter specifies a maximum size for frames sent from local systems to systems on
23. The following sections describe how to add IP multicasting to a router running DLSw using the BCC or Site Manager Using the BCC Before you can configure IP multicasting you must have DLSw SRB and LLC2 configured globally on the router 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 47 Configuring DLSw Services To add DLSw IP multicasting support to a router navigate to the dlsw global prompt for example box dlsw and complete the following tasks 1 Specify RFC 2166 as the RFC version disw rfc type rfc2166 2 Configure multicast IP For example to configure multicast IP with an IP address of 239 255 255 255 and a slot mask of 2 3 4 5 enter disw multicast ip 239 255 255 255 slot mask 2 3 4 5 3 Configure an IP interface For example to configure an IP interface with an address of 2 2 2 1 255 0 0 0 enter the following commands box ethernet 2 1 ethernet 2 1 ip 2 2 2 1 255 0 0 0 ip 2 2 2 2 255 0 0 0 rip ip 2 2 2 2 255 0 0 0 igmp ip 2 2 2 2 255 0 0 0 dvmrp 4 Configure DLSw on an interface For example box token ring 3 1 token ring 3 1 srb int 0x3 srb token ring 3 1 Ile2 1llc2 token ring 3 1 dlsw Note IGMP is now loaded on the slot where DLSw is configured If you want to make changes to global IGMP parameters you must navigate to global IGMP for example box ip igmp 4 48 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services Using Site Manager To add DLSw IP multicasting support to a router
24. _ gt TEST Rsp gt gt TESTRSp REACHACK C XID null rsp XIDFRAME null lt lt XID null req lt ___ _ _ XID null rsp gt XIDFRAME null X D null rsp XID T2 0 XIDFRAME T2 0 XID T2 0 lt lt lt SABME gt COMET 5 SABME gt lt x UA lt UA RNR CONTACTED ANR RR gt i lt RR lt RNR RR gt lt RR RR gt lt RR RR gt lt FRAMES gt lt NFOFRAMES I FRAMES gt Troubleshooting DLSw Networks Router Single switch DLSw SDLC to Frame relay areen CO_ISAP_REG req CO_ISAP_REG rsp CONNECT_SEND red CONNECT_SEND CANUREACH ICANREACH y REACHACK lt __ XIDFRAME null _ XIDFRAME null ed XIDFRAME T2 0 lt __ CONTACT Set_Mode_Send req Set_Mode_Send rsp CONTACTED ao SDLC INFOFRAMES gt FRAMES gt 2 All events in italics are internal to the router lt RR RR End station _ See note 1 DLS0054A Primary SDLC to LLC2 Data Flow Using Single Switch SNA Frame Relay 308622 14 00 Rev 00 C 43 Appendix D Monitoring DLSw Using the BCC show Commands This appendix describes how to use the BCC show commands to obtain DLSw data from the management information base MIB The type and amount of data displayed depend on the specific DLSw information you want to view This appendix includes
25. Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 6 Set SR Interface Ring ID and DLSw Slot IP Address Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 8 Note For a description of SR Interface Ring ID see Configuring Bridging Services Click on OK The Configuration Manager window opens Starting DLSw over FDDI The following sections describe how to configure DLSw over FDDI using the BCC or Site Manager Using the BCC To configure DLSw on an FDDI interface you first configure SRB and DLSw global attributes Then you configure LLC2 SRB and DLSw on that interface For example to configure DLSw on an FDDI interface with default settings navigate in configuration mode to the top level box prompt 1 Configure DLSw global attributes box disw dlsw Specify a slot for the IP interface and the IP address to use for TCP connections based on this slot For example to configure slot 3 with an IP address of 1 1 1 3 enter disw Slot ip 3 ip addr 1 1 1 3 slot ip 3 Return to the box level prompt slot ip 3 box box 3 8 308622 14 00 Rev 00 10 Starting DLSw Services Configure SRB global attributes box srb internal lan id 0x10 bridge id 0x20 srb Return to the box level prompt srb box Specify an FDDI interface on which you want to configure LLC2 SRB and DLSw box fddi 3 1 fddi 3 1 Configure SRB on the FDDI interface
26. Verify the status of the host and attempt to ping the target router Obtain correct XID values Verify that the destination MAC address is correct if the LLC media is Ethernet then flip the address format Obtain flows and traces and contact Nortel Networks SNA stations fail in heavy network traffic Other traffic is taking too much time on the WAN DLC initiated termination of session Use protocol prioritization to provide more bandwidth to SNA Depending on the configuration see the LLC or the SDLC Troubleshooting table 308622 14 00 Rev 00 C 25 Configuring DLSw Services Table C 10 NetBIOS Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Action Solution NetBIOS stations cannot connect over DLSw NetBIOS SAP not configured Excessive broadcast traffic on WAN Configure SAP OxFO in the DLSw SAP TAble Use traffic filters caches or network design to limit unnecessary NetBIOS traffic use protocol prioritization to provide more DLSw bandwidth on the WAN NetBIOS stations cannot keep sessions alive during data transfer PC session level timeout short WAN connectivity is lost or not rerouting fast enough Set the OS 2 IBMLAN INI file parameter SRVHEURISTICS to 9 Use traffic filters caches or network design to limit unnecessary NetBIOS traffic use protocol prioritization to provide more DLSw bandwidth on the WAN C 26
27. 04 25 95 22 43 17 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 45 SSP dl_halted frame rcvd in LLC conn state flag 30927f70 b 0 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Troubleshooting DLSw Networks TCP Open Error 29 The DLSw peer connections through TCP cannot be activated until the source local IP interface becomes active For example token ring networks that take longer to initialize may cause this error in the log The TCP sessions establish when the IP interface activates For example 36 04 25 95 22 43 17 INFO SLOT 1 TCP Event Code 7 TCP Error 29 Opening 192 200 1 25 2065 192 200 4 40 2067 TCB 0x3042cf0 DLSw Peers Not Reachable Due to Lack of a Route IP needs to route the TCP connect request to the remote peer through the standard routing mechanisms If IP cannot reach the destination address the TCP peer connection cannot occur Traffic Going over SRB Instead of DLSw Path Performance is below normal and data traverses the network over SRB instead of the expected DLSw path This could be caused by DLSw configured on the IP WAN interface on the router instead of the destination port where the DLSw traffic is to terminate Resetting Dynamic Window Algorithm Proper LLC flow control operation is indicated by messages stating that the dynamic window algorithm is resetting Expecting SNRM Prior to DLSw Connection to Host See Configuring SDLC Services and check the Pre Activation Contact Frame parameter setti
28. 1 3 local acknowledgment 1 27 local devices adding 3 12 local devices parameters Canureach Retries A 38 Canureach Retries2 A 39 Canureach Timer A 38 Canureach Timer2 A 39 Destination Host MAC hex A 36 Destination Host SAP hex A 37 Device Activation Seq A 42 DLSw Mode A 28 A 30 Enable XID PassThru A 41 Link Station Retries A 40 Link Station Timer A 40 MAXDATA A 37 MAXOUT A 37 PU IDBLOCK A 32 PU IDNUM A 34 PU Name parameter A 31 PU Type A 31 SDLC Receive Credit A 40 SDLC Transmit Credit A 41 Source Virtual MAC hex A 35 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Source Virtual SAP hex A 36 XID Format A 35 MAC Address parameter A 66 MAC address translation configuring 4 59 description of 1 30 parameters MAC Address Translation Support A 25 Original Destination MAC Address A 84 Translated Destination MAC Address A 85 A 86 MAC Address Translation Support parameter A 25 MAC Cache Age parameter A 17 MAC Peer IP Address parameter A 67 Max Queue Buffers for Unconfig Peers parameter A 88 Max Queue Buffers parameter A 46 A 91 Max Queue Size for Unconfig Peers parameter A 88 Max Queue Size parameter A 46 A 91 Max Slot Sessions parameter 2 11 A 15 MAXDATA parameter A 37 Maximum Package Size parameter A 18 MAXOUT parameter A 37 memory requirements 2 10 Multicast IP Address parameter A 74 A 75 Multicast IP Slots parameter A 75 multiple DLSw peers 2 10 Multislot Broadcas
29. Advanced gt Global RFC1434 RFC1434 RFC1795 V2 0 Unicast RFC2166 Multicast Selects the RFC implementation to run on the router RFC 1434 RFC 1795 DLSw Version 2 0 or RFC 2166 Click on Values and select RFC 1434 RFC 1795 V2 0 or RFC 2166 See Chapter 1 Data Link Switching Overview for detailed information on these RFCs 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 28 Maximum Package Size Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Advanced gt Global 1532 0 to 2147483647 bytes Specifies the maximum amount of information in bytes that can reside in one package when sending multiple DLSw frames in a single TCP frame for transmission over a wide area network DLSw does not split switch to switch protocol SSP frames SSP header and user data among multiple packages Specify a value smaller than the TCP Window Size parameter and less than or equal to the Virtual Ring MTU size for the network minus the size of the TCP IP and MAC headers Specify 0 to disable packaging 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 23 A 18 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Packaging Timeout msec Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Advanced gt Global 10 0 to 2147483647 milliseconds ms Specifies the time interval in milliseconds to delay
30. Although similar to the existing circuit level protocol prioritization DLSw prioritization is not limited to synchronous interfaces and does not operate at the driver level DLSw prioritization occurs before TCP sequences packets where the data link control LLC2 or SDLC and TCP function The router sorts packets into priority queues as described in The Enqueuing Process on page 2 16 The router then drains dequeues the priority queues to transmit packets according to a weighted allocation algorithm as described in The Dequeuing Process on page 2 17 308622 14 00 Rev 00 2 15 Configuring DLSw Services Based on the needs of your site you can configure up to 10 queues for each DLSw peer You can create queues for traffic with specific MAC or SAP address ranges or for SNA traffic from criteria in the SNA transmission header FID2 and FID4 You determine whether a queue applies to all DLSw peers or to one or more specific configured peers Default and Peer Specific DLSw Queues To set the way the router handles priority queues for all DLSw traffic including unconfigured peers you use the default DLSw queue configuration To customize the handling of queued traffic for a particular configured peer you configure peer specific priority queues that apply to that peer s IP address only The default priority queue configuration applies to all configured DLSw peers except those individual peers for which you configure a
31. Click on OK The DLSw Basic Interface window opens Set DLSw Slot IP Address Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 8 308622 14 00 Rev 00 3 13 Configuring DLSw Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 11 Click on OK The DLS Local Device Configuration window opens 12 Click on Add The Local Device Configuration window opens 13 Set the following parameters Link Station Address hex PU Name e Source Virtual MAC hex e Source Virtual SAP hex Destination Host MAC hex Destination Host SAP hex Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 30 14 Click on OK The DLS Local Device Configuration window opens 15 Click on Done The Configuration Manager window opens 3 14 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Starting DLSw Services Starting DLSw over Frame Relay To configure DLSw over frame relay IBM provides two types of frame relay support e Boundary Access Node Bridged Format e Boundary Network Node BNN RFC 1490 or Routed SNA Nortel Networks routers select BNN or BAN when you configure the DLSw frame relay network When configuring a frame relay interface for DLSw a message prompts you to select either BNN or BAN Starting DLSw over Frame Relay BAN BAN frames use a standard RFC 1490 Bridged 802 5 over frame relay format Since this is a source routed frame you mu
32. DLSw RSVP Global 0 0 to 2147483647 bytes Specifies the burst size amount in bytes for the outgoing DLSw traffic to use in RSVP reservations for unconfigured peers or peers that will use global parameters Type a value in the range 1 to 2147483647 or accept the default 0 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 39 Incoming Bandwidth Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt DLSw RSVP Global 0 0 to 2147483647 b s Specifies the bandwidth amount b s for the incoming DLSw traffic to use in RSVP reservations for unconfigured peers or peers that will use global parameters Type a value in the range 1 to 2147483647 or accept the default 0 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 40 A 80 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Incoming Burst Size Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt DLSw RSVP Global 0 0 to 2147483647 bytes Specifies the burst size amount in bytes for the incoming DLSw traffic to use in RSVP reservations for unconfigured peers or peers that will use global parameters Type a value in the range 1 to 2147483647 or accept the default 0 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 41 Non Peak Outgoing Bandwidth Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt DLSw
33. REACH_ACK Received 5 XIDFRAME Received 7 CONTACT Received 8 CONTACTED Received 9 INFOFRAME Received 10 HALT_DL Received 14 DL_HALTED Received 15 RESTART_DL Received 16 DL_RESTARTED Received 17 NETBIOS_NQ NETBIOS NQ ex 18 NETBIOS_NQ_cs Received NETBIOS_NR NETBIOS_NR_ex 19 NETBIOS_NR_cs Received DATAFRAME Received 20 HALT _DL_NOACK Received 25 NETBIOS_ANQ Received 26 NETBIOS_ANR Received 27 KEEPALIVE Received 29 CAP_EXCHANGE Received 32 IFCM Received 33 TEST_CIRCUIT_REQ Received 122 TEST_CIRCUIT_RSP Received 123 308622 14 00 Rev 00 C 5 Configuring DLSw Services Sample Log Entries This section describes some common sample DLSw event entries that may appear in the log file The event code in the Nortel Networks log is an internal number that identifies the specific message A description follows each message Event Code 16 15 04 25 95 22 43 01 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 16 State change in connect_conf conn 30927f 70 oldstate 4 new state 3 This message describes major state changes connect_conf The routine processing the frame It is probably a name corresponding to the type of event causing the state change conn 30927f70 The unique connection identifier old state 4 new state 3 The actual state transition occurring Event Code 17 4 04 25 95 22 43 00 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 17 LLC test frame received
34. RFC 1795 with peer configured Host See Figures C 9 to C 12 for mo re details TestP TestF TestP TestF XIDP XIDF DLS0047A Data Flow for Routers Running DLSw Version 2 0 and RFC 1795 Peer on RFC 1795 Router C 36 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Troubleshooting DLSw Networks Figure C 8 shows the data flow between a Nortel Networks router running DLSw Version 2 0 and one running RFC 1795 A peer is configured on the router running Version 2 0 End Router station Version 2 0 Router Host with peer configured RFC 1795 IP O network Z Sn CANUREACH_ex ney via UDP __________ no response f TestP Repeated until fallback attempt Dual TCP connection establishment lt Capabilities exchange See Figures C 9 to S C 12 for more details CANUREACH_ex TestP ees via TCP TestP m e ICANREACH_ex i 3 TestF TestF o via TCP 222 2 a 2 ANE Aol CANUREACH_cs XIDP ae via TCP TestP SS ek SE fs eee eee ICANREACH_cs via TCP opes E lt ee REACHACK XIDFRAME XIDP R te eee XIDF XIDFRAME twee lt _ ___ XIDF 2 eS a an Remaining data flows are the same as in RFC 1795 E z DLS0048A Figure C 8 Data Flow for Routers Running DLSw Version 2 0 and RFC 1795 Peer on Ver
35. THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE In addition the program and information contained herein are licensed only pursuant to a license agreement that contains restrictions on use and disclosure that may incorporate by reference certain limitations and notices imposed by third parties ji 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Nortel Networks NA Inc Software License Agreement NOTICE Please carefully read this license agreement before copying or using the accompanying software or installing the hardware unit with pre enabled software each of which is referred to as Software in this Agreement BY COPYING OR USING THE SOFTWARE YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT THE TERMS EXPRESSED IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE THE ONLY TERMS UNDER WHICH NORTEL NETWORKS WILL PERMIT YOU TO USE THE SOFTWARE If you do not accept these terms and conditions return the product unused and in the original shipping container within 30 days of purchase to obtain a credit for the full purchase price 1 License Grant Nortel Networks NA Inc Nortel Networks grants the end user of the Software Licensee a personal nonexclusive nontransferable license a to use the Software either on a single computer or if applicable on a single authorized device identified by host ID for which it was originally acquired b to copy the Software solely for backup purposes in support of authorized use of the
36. This message indicates that DLS received a specific frame type test Event Code 36 38 04 25 95 22 43 17 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 36 Unexpected protocol action state 11 event 10 conn 30927f 70 These messages show that an illegal or unexpected event occurred Although this does not always indicate a problem with the software there could be a problem with the timer settings configured on each DLSw router If the condition persists or causes improper operation troubleshooting may be necessary state 11 DISCONNECTED event 10 INFOFRAME Received conn 30927f70 The unique connection identifier C 6 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Troubleshooting DLSw Networks Event Code 45 10 04 25 95 22 43 01 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 45 SSP XID frame rcvd in LLC conn state flag 30927f70 4 201 This message describes the receipt of an input frame from either TCP or the DLC SSP XID frame rcvd in LLC The type of frame received XID and where it was received LLC SDLC conn 30927f70 The unique connection identifier for this DLSw circuit It will correspond to the correlator described in the DLSw RFCs state 4 CIRCUIT ESTABLISHED as listed in the DLSw state table see Table C 3 flag 201 Nortel Networks use only DLSw Session Setup Before configuring DLSw you should be familiar with how DLSw establishes sessions between network end points To establish SNA or NetBIOS sessions
37. according to your network traffic needs Note The default priority queue configuration applies to all configured DLSw peers except those configured with a custom priority queue Peer specific queue configurations take precedence over the default DLSw priority queue configuration 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 65 Configuring DLSw Services To customize the default queue configuration complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens 2 Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose Prot Prioritization Outbound 4 Choose Global The Global DLSw PP Parameters Defaults window opens Edit the parameters that you want to change Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 87 Click on OK Configuring Peer Specific Priority Queues The Configuration Manager window opens You create the priority queue configuration for all configured and unconfigured DLSw peers using the Global DLSw PP Parameters Defaults window You customize priority queues for particular configured DLSw peers using the Peer Queue Configuration window Note Peer specific queue configurations take precedence over the default DLSw priority queue configuration 4 66 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services Priority Queues for a Specific DLS
38. an RFC 1434 or RFC 1795 peer backup start time lt bu_start_time gt bu_start_time is the start time when a configured backup peer is available During this time period the local router can establish a TCP connection with this backup peer if the primary peer is unreachable The values are 0 to 2400 in hhmm format The default is 1 backup type lt bu_type gt bu_type is the DLSw backup peer type Values are multicast v20udp v20unknown v20tcp tcp1795 The default is v20unknown 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 55 Configuring DLSw Services peer interoperability lt peer_interoperability gt peer_interoperability allows Nortel Networks routers to operate with other vendors routers The values are enabled and disabled The default is enabled peer ip addr lt peer_ip_addr gt peer_ip_addr is the IP address of the DLSw peer transport type lt transport_type gt transport_type is the transport capability of the remote peer TCP UDP or Unknown The local router attempts to use this configured transport option when establishing a TCP connection with the remote peer This parameter is only valid when rfc type is set to V2 0 The values are tcp udp or unknown The default is unknown For example to change peer interoperability from enabled to disabled complete the following steps 1 Check the current value of the peer interoperability parameter peer 5 5 5 5 peer interoperability peer interoperability enabled 2 Change th
39. fddi 3 1 srb interface ring id 0x30 srb fddi 3 1 Configure LLC2 on the FDDI interface srb fddi 3 1 Ile2 lc2 fddi 3 1 1 Configure DLSw on the FDDI interface lc2 fddi 3 1 dlsw lsw fddi 3 1 isplay DLSw default settings ao goer lsw fddi 3 1 info Using Site Manager To enable DLSw over FDDI complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Add Circuit window opens select the FDDI connector on which you are enabling DLSw services 2 Click on OK The Select Protocols window opens 3 Choose DLSw The DLSw Basic Global Parameters When you choose DLSw you window opens automatically choose LLC2 continued 308622 14 00 Rev 00 3 9 Configuring DLSw Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 4 Set the following parameters SR Internal LAN ID DLSw RFC Version e DLSw Virtual Ring ID hex DLSw Peer IP Address for dual switch networks only Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 4 Note For a description of SR Internal LAN ID see Configuring Bridging Services System responds 5 Click on OK The DLSw Basic Interface window opens 6 Set SR Interface Ring ID and DLSw Slot IP Address Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 8 Note For a description of SR Interfac
40. 0 2 1 and 4 0 devices For more information on the Nortel Networks LLC implementation see Configuring LLC Services 1 22 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Data Link Switching Overview SDLC Support Integrated SDLC support merges SDLC traffic with the multiprotocol traffic of LANs into a single network backbone SDLC operates in DLSw single switch routers or in dual switch to switch networks as illustrated in Figure 1 4 on page 1 12 Integrated SDLC conversion enables existing SDLC traffic to share a backbone network with LAN traffic without an intervening TCP IP network Traffic enters the DLSw router as SDLC and goes out the router as LLC2 over token ring or Ethernet The destination end station can reside on the token ring or Ethernet network directly connected to that DLSw router SRB can forward the traffic through the network to a destination host or end station In this network the local router performs the SDLC conversion and forwards the traffic across the network to the host Figure 1 12 DLSw integrated SDLC supports devices configured as primary or secondary link stations to the router as described in Primary SDLC Support on page 1 24 and Secondary SDLC Support on page 1 25 respectively A link station is a logical connection between adjacent nodes where one node is a primary link station and the other node is a secondary link station Negotiable support is available for PU 4 to PU 4 point to point lin
41. 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Protocols menu opens choose Protocols 2 Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose Default MAC The DLSw MAC Peer Configuration window opens 4 Click on Add The DLSw MAC Configuration window opens 5 Set the following parameters MAC Address MAC Peer IP Address Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 66 6 Click on OK The DLSw MAC Peer Configuration window opens 7 Click on Done The Configuration Manager window opens Editing a DLSw Default MAC Peer IP Table Entry The following sections describe how to edit a DLSw default MAC peer IP table entry using the BCC or Site Manager Using the BCC To change the IP address for a default MAC peer navigate to the mac peer prompt for example box dlsw mac peer lt mac_adadr gt and enter peer ip addr lt peer_ip_adadr gt 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 39 Configuring DLSw Services peer_ip_adadr is the IP address of a remote DLSw peer that can reach the remote SNA system or application identified by the MAC address in the same default MAC peer IP table entry The value is any 32 bit IP address in the form network host using dotted decimal notation For example to change the IP address to 2 2 2 2 enter mac peer 123456789012 peer ip addr 2 2 2 2 mac peer 123456789012 Using Site Manager You can edit only the Default MAC Peer IP Address parameter in a default MAC peer IP ta
42. 100 and maximum number of slot sessions of 1000 dlsw virtual ring 0x001 rfc type rfc1434 virtual ring mtu 100 max slot sessions 1000 Using Site Manager To configure single switch DLSw services complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Protocols menu opens choose Protocols continued 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 3 Configuring DLSw Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 2 Choose DLSw System responds The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose Basic Global The DLSw Basic Global Parameter window opens 4 Set the following parameters DLSw RFC Version DLSw Virtual Ring ID hex DLSw NetBIOS Support Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 4 5 Click on OK The Configuration Manager window opens 6 Choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens 7 Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens 8 Choose Advanced 9 Set the following parameters Max Slot Sessions Virtual Ring MTU Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 15 The Edit DLSw Global Parameters window opens 10 Click on OK DLSw SAP Table The Configuration Manager window opens Every data packet contains a 1 byte destination SAP and source SAP You can select whether DLSw affects packets based on SAPs that are defined to
43. 27 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter DLSw Mode Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Advanced gt Interfaces Default Primary Options Primary Secondary PP Secondary MP Negotiable Function Specifies the type of link station you are configuring on this node A primary link station controls a data link issues commands polls secondary stations and initiates error recovery procedures Only one link station on an SDLC line can be the primary station all other stations on the line must be secondary When configured as a primary SDLC link station the router communicates with downstream PU 2 0 PU 2 1 and PU 4 nodes multipoint configurations only A secondary link station receives commands and responds to primary link station polls When configured as a secondary SDLC link station the router emulates a PU 2 0 or PU 4 node multipoint configurations only When configured as a negotiable SDLC link station the router supports connections to PU 4 devices only Instructions Click on Values and select Primary Secondary PP point to point Secondary MP multipoint or Negotiable MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 2 1 8 Adding Local Device Configuration Parameters The Local Device Configuration window Figure A 7 contains parameters that let you define the SDLC devices that you want to appear as natively attached to the LAN When you define such devices you map the devices to LAN MAC and SAP addresses
44. 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 31 Backup Outgoing Bandwidth Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table gt DLSw RSVP 0 0 to 2147483647 b s Specifies the bandwidth amount b s for the outgoing DLSw traffic to use in RSVP reservations for the backup peer Type a value in the range 1 to 2147483647 or accept the default 0 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 32 A 56 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Backup Outgoing Burst Size Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table gt DLSw RSVP 0 0 to 2147483647 bytes Specifies the burst size amount in bytes for the outgoing DLSw traffic to use in RSVP reservations for the backup peer Type a value in the range 1 to 2147483647 or accept the default 0 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 33 Backup Incoming Bandwidth Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table gt DLSw RSVP 0 0 to 2147483647 b s Specifies the bandwidth amount b s for the incoming DLSw traffic to use in RSVP reservations for the backup peer Type a value in the range 1 to 2147483647 or accept the default 0 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 34 Backup Incoming Burst Size Configuration Manager gt Protoc
45. 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 10 1 3 A 68 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters VCCT Slot Parameter Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID The VCCT Slot Configuration window Figure A 20 contains the Slot Number parameter which allows you to specify the slot for the virtual circuit you created The slot you choose for the virtual circuit must be the same slot on which DLSw and APPN are running Slot Number Figure A 20 VCCT Slot Configuration Window Slot Number Configuration Manager gt DLSw gt Boundary Function gt Add VCCT gt Yes None 1 to 14 Allows you to specify the slot for the virtual circuit you created The slot you choose for the virtual circuit must be the same slot on which DLSw and APPN are running Type a slot number from 1 to 14 depending on the e Type of node chassis e Slots that link modules can occupy N A 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 69 Configuring DLSw Services VCCT Circuit Configuration Parameter Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID The VCCT Cct Configuration window Figure A 21 contains the Circuit Number and the Slot Number parameters which allow you to choose an existing virtual circuit and specify the slot for that virtual circuit The slot you choose for the virtual circuit must be the same slot on which DLSw and APPN are running Circuit Number Slot Number Figure A 21 VCCT
46. 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 3 A 6 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters For DLSw running over token ring or other SRB network or frame relay BAN Bridged SNA RFC 1490 or LLC over SRB the DLSw Basic Global Parameters window Figure A 2 contains source routing parameters that let you e Identify the source routing bridge SR Bridge ID e Specify the source routing bridge s internal LAN ID SR Internal LAN ID For instructions on configuring the source routing parameters see Configuring Bridging Services Cancel OK Values Help DLSw RFC Yersion EFC1434 SR Internal LAN ID 0x0 SR Bridge ID OxA DLSw Virtual Ring ID hex DLSw Reject Unconfigured Peers ACCEPT DLSw NetBIOS Support DLSw RSYP Support DLSw Peer IP Address add only Figure A 2 DLSw Basic Global Parameters Window for SRB 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 7 Configuring DLSw Services DLSw Basic Interface Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID The DLSw Basic Interface Parameters window Figure A 3 lets you specify the DLSw slot IP address DLSw Slot IP Address DLSw Slot IP Address Atm Bridging Mode Figure A 3 DLSw Basic Interface Parameters Window DLSw Slot IP Address Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Basic Interface 0 0 0 0 Any IP address specified in dotted decimal notation Specifies a unique IP address for each slot running DLSw on th
47. 7 0x030002000000 308622 14 00 Rev 00 B 5 Configuring DLSw Services Specifying Source and Destination SAP Code Ranges Table B 6 SAP Codes Description SAP Code XID or TEST 00 Individual Sublayer Mgmt 02 Group Sublayer Mgmt 03 SNA 04 08 0C IP 06 Proway Network Mgmt OE Novell and SDLC Link Servers 10 CLNP ISO OSI 20 34 BPDU 42 X 25 over 802 2 LLC2 7E XNS 80 Nestar 86 Active station list 8E ARP 98 SNAP Subnet Access Protocol AA Banyan VIP BC Novell IPX E0 CLNP ISO OSI EC IBM NetBIOS FO LAN Manager F4 F5 Remote Program load F8 UB FA IBM RPL FC ISO Network Layer FE LLC broadcast FF Table B 6 lists several SAP codes to use when specifying a range for source or destination SAP traffic filter criteria B 6 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Appendix C Troubleshooting DLSw Networks This appendix provides the following information about diagnosing and troubleshooting DLSw networks Topic Page Viewing the DLSw Log Ci Enabling Extended Logging C 2 Using and Decoding the DLSw Log C 3 DLSw Session Setup Cr Establishing DLSw LLC Connections C 8 Establishing DLSw SDLC Connections an Disconnecting from the Network C 14 Troubleshooting DLSw C 15 Verifying the WAN Cabling Flowcharts C 32 This appendix is for network administrators who understand SNA and DLSw Becau
48. DLSw Multicast Configuration window or click on the Values button and select different slots 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 15 1 4 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 75 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Backup Config Configuration Manager gt DLSw gt Multicast IP Table gt Multicast IP Table No Yes No Enables the parameters that allow you to configure a backup peer Accept the default No or click on the Values button and select Yes 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 15 1 5 Backup IP Address Configuration Manager gt DLSw gt Multicast IP Table gt Multicast IP Table 0 0 0 0 Any valid 32 bit IP address in the form network host using dotted decimal notation Specifies the IP address of a backup DLSw peer and adds the peer to the DLSw backup peer IP table A backup peer receives all DLSw related broadcast frames for a given router or network processor if the primary peer router is unavailable or cannot be reached over a TCP connection Enter the IP address of the backup peer 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 15 1 6 Backup Peer Type Configuration Manager gt DLSw gt Multicast IP Table gt Multicast IP Table V20 Unicast Unknown RFC 1795 V20 Unicast TCP V20 Unicast Unknown V20 Unicast UDP
49. DLSw Priority Filters Outbound traffic filters configured with the queue action priority filters determine which DLSw traffic is processed into priority queues In addition to using the Configuration Manager windows described in this manual to configure traffic filter templates you can also edit or copy a traffic filter template using a text editor The Configuration Manager stores all templates for all protocols in the file usr wf template template flt on UNIX or Avf config template fit on the PC Included with the software is a template fit file that contains two sample DLSw protocol prioritization templates that you can use for differentiating SNA and NetBIOS traffic NetBIOS_Queuel and SNA_Queue0 To use the sample templates copy usr w template template fit to the directory from which you start Site Manager your Site Manager working directory If that directory already contains a template fit file rename the existing file or copy the contents of the latest file into your existing file 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 69 Configuring DLSw Services The sample templates place SNA traffic in the default queue QO and NetBIOS traffic in Q1 Using the default queue configuration QO receives 60 percent of the bandwidth and NetBIOS receives 40 percent of the bandwidth To create DLSw priority filters complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manag
50. DLSw peers The scroll box lists each peer and indicates whether it uses the default or a specific queue configuration All of the DLSw peers in Figure A 30 use the default queue configuration The parameters in this window let you specify protocol prioritization Disabled or Enabled and queue information queue buffers and size for the selected peer pI Ee Protocol Priority DISABLED Max Queue Buffers 50 Max Queue Size Figure A 30 Peer Queue Configuration Window A 90 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Protocol Priority Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Prot Prioritization Outbound gt Peer Queue Entries Disabled Enabled Disabled Toggles protocol prioritization on and off for this peer The default disables all priority filters on this peer Accepting the default is useful if you want to temporarily disable protocol priority but leave the outbound filters in place Set to Enabled if you want to turn protocol prioritization on Accept the default Disabled if you want to temporarily disable all protocol prioritization activity on this peer 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 5 Max Queue Buffers Configuration Manager gt Protocol
51. DLUS DVMRP FDDI FEP FID FRAD FIFO HPR IEEE IGMP IP ITU T LAN LANE Advanced Peer to Peer Networking asynchronous transfer mode Boundary Access Node boundary function boundary node identifier Boundary Network Node Consultative Committee on International Telegraph and Telephone class of service data link switching data link connection identifier dependent logical unit requestor dependent logical unit server Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol Fiber Distributed Data Interface front end processor format identifier Frame Relay Access Device first in first out high performance routing Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Internet Gateway Management Protocol Internet Protocol International Telecommunication Union Telecommunications sector formerly CCITT local area network LAN emulation 308622 14 00 Rev 00 xxi Configuring DLSw Services LEC LLC MAC MIB MOSPF MSB MTU NCP NetBIOS OSA PPP PU QLLC RFC R RH RIF RNR RR RSVP RU PVC SAP SDLC SMDS SNA SRB SSP SVC TCP IP LAN emulation client Logical Link Control media access control management information base Multicast Open Shortest Path First most significant bit maximum transmission unit network control program Network Basic Input Output System Open System Adapter Point to Point Protocol physical unit Qualified Logical Link Control Request for Comments response request header routing
52. Dual Switch Network Example cccccescececeeeeseeeseeeeeeesaeeesenees 4 9 Sample Network with Slot Table Definitions c cccseceeeeeeeeesteeeeenees 4 14 Sample Network with Peer IP Table Definitions c cecseceseeeeeeees 4 21 DLSw Basic Global Parameters Window c cccceeeeeseeteeteeeeteeeeenes A 4 DLSw Basic Global Parameters Window for SRB sessen A 7 DLSw Basic Interface Parameters Window ccccecceeeseeseteeeetteeeeeees A 8 DLSw Basic Interface Parameters for SRB 0 S A 9 Edit DLSw Global Parameters Window ssesssissrsssrisiieirissirissireaiisesisain n A 11 DLSw Interface Configuration WiINdOW cccceeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeereeeeeees A 26 Local Device Configuration Window cccciicccsccoceistscincsuesnciveniecaienedesencans A 29 DLS Local Device Configuration Window sssseessessseseresrsssrreressns A 43 Add DLSw Peer Configuration WindOW ccccccceeeeeeeeceeeeeteeeeeneeetes A 44 DLSw Peer Contiguration WINDOW sscccesiccescccnctassevcesutasrstinttcndriaduneebers A 45 Edit DLSw Peer RSVP Parameters WindOW cccccceceesteeeteeseeees A 51 Add DLSw Slot Configuration Window 066 P a ere A 58 DLSw Slot Configuration Window susssssisssiiiisnma A 59 DLSw SAP Parameter WINGOW secccctcnsisscacisesiacseentadanresssdeuivad cannes A 60 DLSw SAP Configuration Wind OW scccccscccnseniatsetarttectentetareitnetciaas A 61 DLSw NetBIOS Configuration Wind
53. If the Non Peak Start Time value is greater than the Non Peak End Time value the router assumes that the Non Peak End Time value is after midnight For example if you set the start time to 1700 and the end time to 0800 the end time occurs on the following day Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Non Peak Starting Days Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt DLSw RSVP Global None 0000000 SUNDAY MONDAY TUESDAY WEDNESDAY THURSDAY FRIDAY SATURDAY Specifies the days you want RSVP to use the values set for the Non Peak Start and End Time and Non Peak Bandwidth and Burst Size parameters Click on the Values button Select the days you want RSVP to be active For example if you select SUNDAY and MONDAY then the value in the Non Peak Starting Days field appears as 1100000 To disable this parameter and the Non Peak Start and End Time parameters enter all Os 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 48 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring DLSw Services Adding MAC Address Translation Parameters The DLSw MAC Address Translation window Figure A 27 allows you to specify the original destination MAC address and the translated destination MAC address Original Destination MAC Address Translated Destination MAC Address Figure A 27 DLSw MAC Address Translation Window Parameter Original Destination MAC Address Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt MAC
54. MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters NetBIOS Name NetBIOS Peer Ip Address 198 42 61 4 y Figure A 16 DLSw NetBIOS Configuration Window NetBIOS Name Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Default NetBIOS gt Add None Any valid NetBIOS name Specifies the name of the remote NetBIOS client server or application that you want to reach via DLSw services Enter the name of the remote NetBIOS client or server station or application that you want to reach via DLSw services 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 11 1 2 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 63 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter NetBIOS Peer IP Address Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Default NetBIOS gt Add Default None Options Any valid 32 bit IP address in the form network host using dotted decimal notation Function Specifies the IP address of the DLSw peer that can reach the remote NetBIOS client server or application named in the same DLSw default NetBIOS peer IP table entry Instructions Enter the IP address of the DLSw peer that can reach the remote client or server station or application named in the same DLSw default NetBIOS peer IP table entry The router adds this IP address to the list of configured peers in the local DLSw peer IP table MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 11 1 3 DLSw Default NetBIOS Peer IP Table Entry Parameter The DLSw NetBIOS Peer Configuration window Figure A 17 contains a parameter that le
55. Size A 80 RSVP Mode parameter A 52 RSVP peer parameters Backup Incoming Bandwidth A 57 Backup Incoming Burst Size A 57 Backup Outgoing Bandwidth A 56 Backup Outgoing Burst Size A 57 Incoming Bandwidth A 53 Incoming Burst Size A 53 Non Peak End Time A 55 Non Peak Incoming Bandwidth A 54 Non Peak Incoming Burst Size A 55 Non Peak Outgoing Bandwidth A 54 Non Peak Outgoing Burst Size A 54 Non Peak Start Time A 55 Non Peak Starting Days A 56 Outgoing Bandwidth A 52 Outgoing Burst Size A 53 RSVP Mode A 52 RSVP Slots A 52 RSVP Slots parameter A 52 308622 14 00 Rev 00 S SAP address in a TEST frame 2 6 in an explorer frame 2 5 SAP parameter A 61 SAP Table parameters SAP A 61 SAP Window A 62 SAP Window parameter A 62 SAP window purpose of 2 12 SAPs 4 4 SDLC conversion 1 23 topologies 1 23 SDLC Receive Credit parameter A 40 SDLC Transmit Credit parameter A 41 secondary link stations 1 23 secondary SDLC operations 1 25 show commands D 1 single switch SDLC conversion 1 23 single switch services 1 11 Slot IP Table parameters IP Address A 59 A 60 Slot A 58 Slot Number parameter A 69 A 71 Slot parameter A 58 A 74 SNA Fallback Attempts parameter A 23 SNA sample template 4 69 4 70 Source Virtual MAC hex parameter A 35 Source Virtual SAP hex parameter A 36 SR Bridge ID parameter A 7 SR Interface Ring ID parameter A 9 SR Internal LAN ID parameter
56. Software and c to use and copy the associated user manual solely in support of authorized use of the Software by Licensee This license applies to the Software only and does not extend to Nortel Networks Agent software or other Nortel Networks software products Nortel Networks Agent software or other Nortel Networks software products are licensed for use under the terms of the applicable Nortel Networks NA Inc Software License Agreement that accompanies such software and upon payment by the end user of the applicable license fees for such software 2 Restrictions on use reservation of rights The Software and user manuals are protected under copyright laws Nortel Networks and or its licensors retain all title and ownership in both the Software and user manuals including any revisions made by Nortel Networks or its licensors The copyright notice must be reproduced and included with any copy of any portion of the Software or user manuals Licensee may not modify translate decompile disassemble use for any competitive analysis reverse engineer distribute or create derivative works from the Software or user manuals or any copy in whole or in part Except as expressly provided in this Agreement Licensee may not copy or transfer the Software or user manuals in whole or in part The Software and user manuals embody Nortel Networks and its licensors confidential and proprietary intellectual property Licensee shall not sublicense assign or o
57. Switch SNAFame FISD assis cc cncvncetaccreatinsdmeceantedariie eia a a aR C 42 Primary SDLC to LLC2 Data Flow Using Single Switch IRISH Frame Relay garnere pert reer peter Perr rrenn rer tr eseyrettrt rer rrtmesey rrr pea rere errr re C 43 308622 14 00 Rev 00 XV Table A 1 Table A 2 Table B 1 Table B 2 Table B 3 Table B 4 Table B 5 Table B 6 Table C 1 Table C 2 Table C 3 Table C 4 Table C 5 Table C 6 Table C 7 Table C 8 Table C 9 Table C 10 Table C 11 Table C 12 Table C 13 Table C 14 Table C 15 Table C 16 Tables Customizing the DLow Support Protocols ccccsscccesscsescseaseevsadnoneed A 3 IDBLOCK Numbers for Switched PUS ccccesseeeeeessteeeeeseeseeeeeesaes A 33 Predefined Outbound Filter Criteria Based on DLSw Header B 2 DLSw Reference Points for FID2 Frames cc csececseesceeeesseteeeeseeeeaees B 3 DLSw Reference Points for FID4 Frames Gira Geers ieee B 3 Format for Specifying Source Routing MAC Addresses ccceee B 4 Functional MAC Addresses cccecceeeeeseceeeeceneceeeesceeeeeeeesseesaeeeseeeaaeess B 5 A CSS E dina Gio ae ieee B 6 Extended Logging Commands for Subsystems c sscceceeesteeeeeeeees C 2 Karsti a 2 A E ern T E reer ere Unt E E ea emt C 3 DE ae SaO TAN aia aa C 4 DLS Evom THE secina C 5 Common DLSw Problems cccceeees PE EEE PERA C 17 DLSw Configuration Toubleshooting scs
58. a package before sending it to TCP This value is based on the Packaging Threshold parameter The value should not be greater than the time it takes to send the number of outstanding bytes before packaging begins Type any positive integer in the range 0 to 2147483647 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 24 Packaging Threshold Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Advanced gt Global 20 0 to 100 percent Specifies the percentage of the DLSw TCP window that must be in use if DLSw is to delay sending a package one that is currently being built The default value 20 percent allows DLSw to send a package to TCP only if the TCP Window is currently using less than 3200 bytes 20 percent of the default TCP Window Size of 16 000 bytes This mechanism ensures that small packages such as acknowledgments are not delayed Type a value in the range 0 to 100 percent A value of 50 percent indicates that if 50 percent of the TCP window size is being used DLSw issues the delay as specified by the Packaging Timeout parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 25 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Multislot Broadcasts Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Advanced gt Global Default Enable Options Enable Disable Function Broadcasts received CANUREACH frames over all DLSw slots or to the specific DLSw slots on which the frames are received By default when the router receives CANUREACH frames ov
59. are both SDLC and b when host attachment is a Local Major Node such as 3174 DSPU or ESM 5745 DSPU 4 28 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services Editing a Local Device The following sections describe how to edit a local device using the BCC or Site Manager Using the BCC To edit a local device navigate to the local device prompt for example box serial 5 2 sdic disw local device and change one or more of the following parameters activation sequence lt activation_sequence gt activation_sequence is the order in which you want SDLC PU2 0 fixed format primary devices activated The values are localdevicefirst and peerfirst The default is localdevicefirst canureach retries lt canureach_retries gt canureach_retries specifies the number of times a CANUREACH message is initially sent to the remote DLSw peer to establish a session The values are 0 to 4294967295 The default is 4294967295 canureach retries 2 lt canureach_retries_2 gt canureach_retries_2 is the number of times a CANUREACH message is sent to the remote DLSw peer to establish a session This parameter becomes active when the standard canureach retries expires The values are 0 to 4294967295 The default is 4294967295 canureach timer lt canureach_timer gt canureach_timer specifies the time interval in seconds after which the router sends a CANUREACH message to the remote DLSw peer to establish a session The values are 0
60. at the router source route bridging SRB and LLC 2 frames destined for a token ring or frame relay network The router then forwards the traffic to the destination network using DLSw Previously you could forward traffic only between token ring and or frame relay networks using SRB While you typically use BAN2 termination with frame relay networks you can also use it to locally terminate any SRB to SRB connection Therefore you can locally terminate token ring to token ring token ring to frame relay BAN and frame relay BAN to frame relay BAN interfaces in a single switch DLSw router Figure 1 17 shows a network using BAN2 termination to forward LLC traffic from a token ring to a frame relay network using DLSw In this network frame relay BAN is configured on the router interfaces BAN allows the exchange of LLC traffic across the network The traffic SNA data includes destination and source MAC addresses If the data contains an SRB header the RIF field is also carried across the network When the router receives the LLC traffic it terminates it At the same time the router establishes a new LLC connection to carry the traffic over the frame relay network If the router receives bridged traffic it terminates the SRB RIF and creates a new one thereby allowing for a larger bridged network 308622 14 00 Rev 00 1 33 Configuring DLSw Services Mainframe 3745 3745
61. attached LAN devices Chapter 4 Customizing DLSw Services describes how to configure local devices Figure 1 12 illustrates DLSw single switch networks where Nortel Networks routers function as primary SDLC nodes 1 24 308622 14 00 Rev 00 og NetBIOS server SNA processor oO Token ring Frame relay backbone LLC2 Bay Networks router Frame relay only Data Link Switching Overview _ Cluster controller eal O o SDLC L 4 Ethernet LLC2 Bay Networks router Token ring DLS0003A a A AE ear en ne oe ene E le ta ee Oe oe ea Logical connection Figure 1 12 Primary SDLC Routers in Single Switch DLSw Networks Secondary SDLC Support A Nortel Networks router acting as a secondary device on an SDLC link can e Support a single or multiple SDLC link communicating to an FEP or other SNA host e Allow SNA devices attached to multiple remote routers to share a single SDLC link to the FEP e Attach to the FEP directly using a null modem cable or using a leased line Figure 1 13 illustrates DLSw single and dual switch networks where Nortel Networks routers serve as secondary SDLC nodes 308622 14 00 Rev 00 1 25 Configuring DLSw Services SDLC secondary routers 1 t 3174 Host a Pi f ll o 3174
62. connection is inactive for a period of time TCP determines a lost connection either a failed link with no rerouting possible or an unavailable remote router based on TCP attempts to deliver this data If TCP does not receive an acknowledgment after a series of retries it declares the connection down and informs DLSw DLSw then manages the currently active sessions There are four main configuration parameters associated with TCP timers e KeepAlive Time e KeepAlive Retry Timer e KeepAlive Retries e TCP Inact Time For information about the parameters refer to Appendix A Site Manager Parameters 308622 14 00 Rev 00 2 11 Configuring DLSw Services Flow Control DLSw uses the following flow control mechanisms to provide reliable end to end delivery of packets e LLC2 flow control e TCP flow control e DLSw RFC 1434 fixed and RFC 1795 adaptive pacing LLC2 and TCP continue to assert flow control until congestion clears on a given TCP connection The default settings for system parameters relevant to LLC2 and TCP flow control are suitable for the majority of your DLSw service requirements LLC2 Flow Control The LLC2 protocol interface provides a bidirectional window and a SAP credit allocation that together manage flow control on individual LLC2 connections between the router and LAN attached SNA or NetBIOS systems The SAP window attempts to limit the number of outstanding frames queued for transmission to a remo
63. custom priority queue Peer specific queues take precedence over the default queue The Enqueuing Process The router enqueues packets that match a DLSw priority filter as follows 1 Applies filter rules 2 Stamps packets with a queue number 3 Places packets in appropriate queues The router holds packets in the assigned priority queue according to how you configure DLSw protocol prioritization Based on the needs of your site you can configure up to 10 queues QO to Q9 for each DLSw peer For example you can assign a separate queue for each filter criterion for specific address ranges or for particular DLSw peers When you enable DLSw protocol prioritization you distribute the available bandwidth for a configured DLSw peer among its priority queues The combined bandwidth of each peer s queues totals 100 percent By default there are two DLSw priority queues QO receives 60 percent of the bandwidth and Q1 receives 40 percent 2 16 308622 14 00 Rev 00 DLSw Implementation Notes Nonordered Queues Although Site Manager numbers the DLSw priority queues the queue number hierarchy does not determine priority You configure both the number of queues for each DLSw peer and the percentage of bandwidth assigned to each queue For example you can assign 50 percent of available bandwidth to Q3 and 25 percent each to QI and QO The Dequeuing Process The algorithm for DLSw bandwidth allocation is called weighted dequeuin
64. descriptions of the following show commands Command Page show disw all D 2 show dlsw connections D 2 show dlsw global D 3 how dlsw interf D show dlsw local devices D 7 show dlsw mac peers D 8 show disw multicast ip D show disw netbios peers D 10 show disw peers D 11 show disw saps Det2 show dlsw slots D 13 show disw summary D 13 308622 14 00 Rev 00 D 1 Configuring DLSw Services show dlsw all The show dlsw all command shows all information that you can display using the show dlsw global show disw interfaces show disw mac peers show disw multicast ip show dlsw netbios peers show disw peers show dlsw saps show dlsw slots and show disw local devices commands This command does not use command filters or arguments See the following sections for information included in the output show disw connections The show disw connections command shows a list of DLSw connections This command allows the following command filters and arguments circuit lt circuit name gt dest mac lt mac adar gt src mac lt mac adar gt remote ip lt p addr gt local ip lt ip addr gt Shows the DLSw connection that matches the specified circuit Shows DLSw connections that match the specified destination MAC address Shows DLSw connections that match the specified source MAC address Shows DLSw connections that match the specified remote IP address
65. frames to locate the remote peer MAC address prior to establishing the connection The remote UDP peer can revert to RFC1795 protocols only if it receives a TCP connection from the local peer along with a capabilities exchange message Enter the number of attempts in the range 0 to 2147483647 Enter 0 to specify that only one connection attempt should be made before reverting to an earlier RFC 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 32 NetBIOS Fallback Time sec Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Advanced gt Global 180 0 to 2147483647 s Specifies the period of time before a peer router with a Transport Type of Unknown reverts to RFC 1795 protocols when a NetBIOS name query from the router goes unacknowledged The NetBIOS Fallback Time parameter operates with DLSw Version 2 and RFC 2166 Enter a time in the range 0 to 2147483647 seconds 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 33 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 23 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID TCP Inact Time sec Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Advanced gt Global 300 0 to 2147483647 s Specifies the period of inactivity to elapse before terminating a TCP connection Inactivity results after a prior session has terminated or if no data has been transferred The TCP Inact Time parameter functions wit
66. group LAN IDs and ring IDs in the network DLC Type Data link connection type For example LLC SRB LLC Encaps or SDLC D 6 308622 14 00 Rev 00 show dlsw local devices Monitoring DLSw Using the BCC show Commands The show disw local devices command shows a list of configured local devices with general information The command allows the following command filter and argument circuit lt circuit name gt Shows local device information for the specified circuit name only The output includes the following information Circuit Name Addr State Destination MAC Source MAC DSAP SSAP PU Type ID Block ID Num Circuit name assigned to the interface Address of the link station State of the DLSw service up down init initializing disabled or absent Destination and source MAC addresses Destination SAP address and Source SAP address Type of XID sending node T1 0 T2 0 T2 1 T4 Block number Number must match the host s IDBLOCK value ID number Number must match the host s IDNUM value 308622 14 00 Rev 00 D 7 Configuring DLSw Services show disw mac peers The show disw mac peers command displays a list of configured MAC peers This command allows the following command filters and arguments address lt mac addr gt Shows the MAC peer information for the specified MAC address peer lt ip addr gt Shows the MAC peer information for the specified peer IP address The
67. in that frame 2 6 308622 14 00 Rev 00 DLSw Implementation Notes The transparent bridge interface on the same circuit with DLSw never sees TEST frames that contain destination SAP addresses intended for DLSw Figure 2 4 However SAP addresses intended for DLSw can pass from one local Ethernet interface to another over DLSw Therefore non DLSw SAPs will be transparently bridged between transparent bridge interfaces while DLSw forwards SAPs between interfaces You configure transparent bridge services independently of DLSw services on the router as appropriate for the topology of your network Router Forward to DLSw Bridge packet SAP gt defined to DLSw Forward to bridge DLS0029A Figure 2 4 DLSw and Transparent Bridging on Ethernet 802 3 Circuits DLSw with Translation Bridge The router supports DLSw and translation bridge services on an Ethernet 802 3 circuit Figure 2 5 You configure translation bridge services independently of DLSw services on the router as appropriate for the topology of your network To an end user system on an SRB circuit the translation bridge looks like a source routing bridge To an end user system on an Ethernet 802 3 circuit the translating bridge looks like a transparent bridge 308622 14 00 Rev 00 2 7 Configuring DLSw Services Bay Networks router Translating bridge service i Source routing ii l bridge ii 7 l p S Token ring
68. information field receiver not ready receiver ready Resource Reservation Protocol request unit permanent virtual circuit service access point Synchronous Data Link Control switched multimegabit data service Systems Network Architecture source route bridging Switch to Switch Protocol switched virtual circuit Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol xxii 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Preface TH transmission header UDP User Datagram Protocol VCCT virtual circuit VTAM virtual telecommunications access method WAN wide area network XID exchange identification Related Publications For more information about using DLSw refer to the following publications Dixon Roy C and David M Kushi Data Link Switching Switch to Switch Protocol RFC 1434 March 1993 IBM Corporation NetBIOS Frames Protocol IBM Local Area Technical Reference SC30 3383 03 December 1990 International Standards Organization ISO 8802 2 IEEE Std 802 2 International Standard Information Processing Systems Local Area Networks Part 2 Logical Link Control December 31 1989 International Standards Organization ISO IEC DIS 10038 DAM 2 MAC Bridging Source Routing Supplement December 1991 Wells L and A Bartky Data Link Switching Switch to Switch Protocol RFC 1795 April 1995 Bryant D and P Brittain DLSw v2 0 Enhancements RFC 2166 June 1997 Synchronous Data Link Control Concepts GA27 3093 04 IBM Corp 1979 1992
69. lt ink_station_addr gt link_station_addr is the address of the link station This value must match the polling address defined in the SDLC attached device The value is any hexadecimal link station address from 0x01 to OxFE link station retries lt ink_station_retries gt link_station_retries is the maximum number of times that a connect request is sent to the local SDLC device to establish a session The values are 0 to 4294967295 The default is 4294967295 4 30 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services link station timer lt ink_station_timer gt link_station_timer sets the time interval in seconds after which the router sends a connect request to the local SDLC device to establish a session The values are 0 to 3600 The default is 30 seconds mode lt mode gt mode is the type of link station you are configuring on this node The values are primary secondarypp point to point secondarymp multipoint and negotiable The default is primary pu name lt pu_name gt pu_name is the name of the adjacent link station The value is any 8 byte ASCII name pu type lt pu_type gt pu_type is the type of XID sending node The values are T1 0 T2 0 T2 1 T4 rx credit lt rx_credit gt rx_credit is the maximum number of frames that SDLC can send to DLSw This parameter is for flow control The values are 0 to 200 The default is 10 source mac lt source_mac gt source_mac is the source MAC address of an e
70. menu opens 2 Choose Global Protocols The Global Protocols window opens 3 Choose VCCT The VCCT menu opens 4 Click on Interfaces The VCCT circuits window opens listing all the virtual circuits on the router Each entry specifies the slot and circuit number of the virtual circuit 5 Make a note of the circuit number of the VCCT you have created 6 Click on Done The Configuration Manager window opens 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 45 Configuring DLSw Services Step 4 Adding an APPN Interface to an Existing Virtual Circuit To add an APPN interface to an existing virtual circuit complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens virtual circuit to which you want to add an APPN interface 7 Click on Done 2 Choose APPN The APPN menu opens 3 Choose Boundary Function The Boundary Function window opens 4 Click on Add VCCT The message Do you want to create a new Virtual Circuit or use an existing one appears 5 Click on Cancel to use an existing virtual The VCCT CCT Configuration window circuit opens 6 Enter the slot and circuit number of the The APPN Configuration window opens Enter a MAC address and a SAP for the interface as described in Configuring APPN Services Click on Done The message
71. mii S oO 192 32 20 1 NetBIOS server NetBIOS client AS 400 192 32 20 2 Router C Router B 192 32 30 2 192 32 30 1 Frame relay Frame relay 192 32 40 1 192 32 40 2 Circuitless Z OrOUlEwro 192 32 200 1 Frame relay cries a 192 32 100 1 Front end SDLC processor control unit Router B Router A Router C Slot Table Slot Table Slot Table 192 32 30 2 1 192 32 100 1 192 32 200 1 3 192 32 30 1 4 192 32 10 1 DLS0022A Figure 4 4 Sample Network with Slot Table Definitions 4 14 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Adding a DLSw Slot IP Table Entry Customizing DLSw Services The following sections describe how to add a DLSw slot IP table entry using the BCC or Site Manager Using the BCC To add a new DLSw slot IP table entry navigate to the dlsw global prompt for example box dlsw and enter slot ip lt s ot gt ip addr lt ip_adar gt slot is the slot number for the IP interface address that you reserved for that slot ijp_adar is an IP address for a DLSw peer slot in the router TCP uses this IP address for connections associated with that slot For example to specify slot 3 with an IP address of 1 1 1 4 enter dlsw sl
72. much larger MTUs When configuring DLSw for local token ring to Ethernet translation bridge topologies the Virtual Ring MTU parameter should not exceed 1500 This sets the token ring MTU size so that Ethernet end stations can accept the token ring traffic Entering a new value or accepting the default value for this mandatory parameter helps to prepare end stations for the MTUs of remote LANs 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 10 Note The DLSw IP Virtual Ring and Virtual Ring MTU parameters that appear in the Edit DLSw Global Parameters window are primarily for compatibility with SRB networks locally attached to the router However Site Manager requires you to enter a value for the DLSw IP Virtual Ring even if you are configuring DLSw services on non SRB segments locally attached to the same router A 16 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters MAC Cache Age secs Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Advanced gt Global 300 0 to 4294967295 seconds s Specifies the maximum number of seconds that inactive MAC addresses can exist in the MAC to DLSw mapping cache Enter a value to limit the amount of memory that inactive MAC cache entries consume for
73. network can use the same value The number must be e Unique among any other ring IDs group LAN IDs or internal LAN IDs assigned in the network e The same as the virtual ring number used by all other DLSw peers on the same TCP IP network Entering a hexadecimal value for this mandatory parameter prepares the router for DLSw services on token ring 802 5 circuits Enter a value even if you are presently configuring DLSw services on Ethernet 802 3 circuits only Nortel Networks recommends the value 0xB 13 if this value is available 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 5 DLSw Reject Unconfigured Peers Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Basic Global Accept Accept Reject Specifies whether DLSw peers in this router should allow Accept or disallow Reject TCP sessions with other DLSw peers not defined in the DLSw peer table Select Accept if you want to allow TCP sessions with Nortel Networks or other DLSw peers not defined in the peer table Select Reject if you want to disallow TCP sessions with Nortel Networks or other DLSw peers not defined in the peer table Disallowing TCP sessions prevents the router from learning the IP addresses of other peers in the network 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 13 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 5 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object
74. number a Test P _____ CANUREACH ICANREACH gt lt lt REACHACK lt __ _ NULL xID P lt lt XIDFRAME NULL lt _ _ NULL XID P 10 NULL XID F gt XIDFRAME NULL gt NULL XID F lt NULL T2 P lt _____ XIDFRAME T2 12 SABME gt lt _ UA lt _ RNR CONTACT gt UA _ _ CONTACTED DLS0032A Figure C 1 Sample DLSw LLC2 Network Connection Sequence RFC 1434 308622 14 00 Rev 00 C 9 Configuring DLSw Services Reviewing the Network Log This section describes the debug event messages that Router B logs when it establishes a connection with router A see Figure C 1 on page C 9 Each message begins with a number that you can use to reference the network activity shown in Figure C 1 The initial connection sequence begins when the terminal sends a Test P packet to router B Router B sends aCANUREACH to router A router A forwards a Test P frame to the host 4 04 25 95 22 43 00 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 17 LLC test frame received The host computer returns a Test F frame informing router A that it is available Router A then sends the ICANREACH frame to router B Router B sends a Test F frame to the terminal 8 04 25 95 22 43 00 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 18 SSP ICANREACH in LLC frame received connection 30927 70
75. of bits per packet and yields low network overhead Therefore you must explicitly define the PVC to carry the packet to its destination You do this with the LLC2 frame relay mapping table The mapping table consists of three fields e DLCI which represents a frame relay PVC e Remote MAC which is the destination MAC address e Local MAC which is the source MAC address Each entry requires that you specify the Remote MAC Local MAC or both A packet that matches this entry is then forwarded to the specified data link connection identifier DLCD 308622 14 00 Rev 00 1 29 Configuring DLSw Services Boundary Access Node RFC 1490 BAN is an IBM router enhancement BAN refers to the RFC 1490 specification for Bridged SNA over frame relay The associated IBM NCP 7 3 enhancement is called the boundary node identifier BNI Since BAN carries the destination and source MAC addresses in the network packets this format carries more bits per packet and requires less configuration Standard BAN uses the SRB frame format Nortel Networks routers select BAN source route encapsulation when you configure the frame relay network MAC Address Translation MAC address translation allows you to redirect SNA and NetBIOS traffic to a different host destination address than configured in your PC The redirection process takes place on all LLC interfaces including token ring Ethernet and frame relay Boundary Access Node BAN interfaces for out
76. on the router based on the current setting of the associated Enable parameter and the current state of the associated circuit Select Disable to switch every DLSw interface existing on the node to the inactive state Select Enable to globally reinitialize all DLSw interfaces configured on the node 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 2 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter TCP Window Size Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Advanced gt Global Default 8000 Options 5000 to 64000 octets Function Specifies in octets the maximum amount of DLSw data that the local and remote TCP entities can send before requiring an acknowledgment or can receive before acknowledging The TCP Window Size parameter informs DLSw about how much data can be outstanding on a TCP connection The size of the window affects performance latency flow control and memory usage A larger window causes less flow control to occur with a possible increase in latency Editing the TCP Window Size parameter affects new TCP session establishment only Existing sessions are unaffected Instructions Type any valid number of octets Generally networks with slower line speeds require smaller window sizes while networks with faster line speeds benefit from larger windows The default value is acceptable for most networks A TCP Window Size setting of 5000 octets may be appropriate for low speed lines or networks running over low spe
77. opens 4 Set the following parameters DLSw RFC Version DLSw Virtual Ring ID hex DLSw NetBIOS Support DLSw Peer IP Address optional Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 4 5 Click on OK The Configuration Manager window opens 6 Choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens 7 Choose DLSw 8 Choose Basic Interface The DLSw menu opens The DLSw Basic Interface Parameters window opens Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 8 9 Set the DLSw Slot IP Address parameter 10 Click on OK The Configuration Manager window opens 11 Choose Protocols The Protocols window opens continued 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 11 Configuring DLSw Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 12 Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens 13 Choose Advanced The Edit DLSw Global Parameters window opens 14 Set the following parameters TCP Window Size KeepAlive Time sec Reject Unconfigured Peers MAC Cache Age TCP inact Time sec Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 13 15 Click on OK The Configuration Manager window opens DLSw Slot Table Each slot on a Nortel Networks router running DLSw acts as an independent data link switch You identify each slot by assigning a unique IP address for the slot This mapping
78. outbound filters for DLSw traffic from predefined criteria based on the DLSw header Table B 1 Table B 1 Predefined Outbound Filter Criteria Based on DLSw Header Packet Type or Component Predefined Criteria Any MAC Source Address MAC Destination Address DSAPT SSAPT FID4 FID Type Network Priority Trans Priority Dest Subarea Address Origin Subarea Address Expedited Flow Indicator Destination Element Origin Element User Defined FID2 FID Type EFI Expedited Flow Indicator Destination Element DAF Destination Address Field OAF Origin Address Field User Defined See Specifying MAC Address Ranges on page B 4 t See Specifying Source and Destination SAP Code Ranges on page B 6 B 2 308622 14 00 Rev 00 DLSw Reference Points Criteria for DLSw Prioritization Tables B 2 and B 3 list the predefined DLSw reference points for outbound traffic filters based on the SNA transmission header Table B 2 DLSw Reference Points for FID2 Frames Criteria FID2 Reference Point Offset bits Length bits Format Identifier FID SNA_START 0 4 Expedited Flow Indicator EFI SNA_START 7 1 Destination Address Field DAF SNA_START 16 8 Origin Address Field OAF SNA_START 24 8 Table B 3 DLSw Reference Points for FID4 Frames Criteria FID4 Reference Point Offset bits Length bits Format Identifie
79. packets in priority queues It then uses a dequeuing allocation algorithm to drain the queues and transmit traffic Priority queues do not affect traffic as it is entering the router but rather affect the sequence in which data leaves an interface For this reason protocol prioritization is considered an outbound filter mechanism 308622 14 00 Rev 00 DLSw Implementation Notes Types of Protocol Prioritization There are two separate implementations of protocol priority queuing For all synchronous protocols that support outbound traffic filters Nortel Networks supports a high normal and low priority queue at the circuit interface level For inbound and outbound DLSw traffic Nortel Networks also supports 1 to 10 queues at the TCP level for DLSw peers Using existing protocol prioritization support you can prioritize DLSw traffic before other protocols DLSw protocol prioritization gives preference to specific types of DLSw traffic such as e Ethernet e Frame relay e SDLC e Tokenring e Other SRB traffic Note You can apply both circuit level and TCP level prioritization to DLSw traffic Note that TCP level prioritization alone does not give DLSw traffic precedence over other routing protocols For information about circuit level prioritization see Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization DLSw Priority Queues This section describes how DLSw protocol prioritization works and defines DLSw terms
80. parameters from multiple subsystems the software combines these parameters with the DLSw configuration screens Selecting DLSw may enable the following subsystems e A data link control subsystem such as LLC2 for LAN media and frame relay SDLC QLLC or APPN boundary function e SRB or bridge subsystems e TCP and IP subsystems dual switch only where DLSw uses TCP IP to ensure reliable data delivery Also when you enable DLSw for the first time on a Nortel Networks router the software automatically displays a set of DLSw screens These screens display parameters that DLSw requires before it can successfully communicate on the network These parameters include e DLSw global e DLSw interface e Slot table Combining DLSw and SRB A router running DLSw can communicate with a router running in an SRB configuration Multiple SRB networks can be interconnected locally or across a TCP IP backbone using DLSw Figure 2 1 DLSw with SRB allows up to 13 total hops This means that 6 hops are allowed on each side of the DLSw network plus 1 hop reserved exclusively for DLSw All other rules for configuring SRB networks using Nortel Networks routers apply For detailed information on SRB see Configuring Bridging Services 2 2 308622 14 00 Rev 00 DLSw Implementation Notes Kono Note No more than 6 rings and 5 bridges are allowed in sequence external to the router
81. peers The multicast IP address for an entry The maximum time a backup peer can remain connected to the local DLSw peer The time to wait in seconds after the primary peer is declared unreachable before the local router initiates a TCP connection to the backup peer IP address of the primary peer The type of DLSw backup peer multicast v20udp v20unknown v2Otcp tcp1795 The show disw netbios peers command displays a list of configured NetBIOS peers This command allows the following command filters and arguments name lt netbios name gt peer lt peer ip adar gt Shows the NetBIOS peer information for the specified NetBIOS name Shows the NetBIOS peer information for the specified peer IP address The output includes the following information Remote Station Name Remote IP Address The name of the remote NetBIOS client server or application to reach via DLSw services The IP address of the DLSw peer that can reach the remote NetBIOS client server or application 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Monitoring DLSw Using the BCC show Commands show dlsw peers The show dlsw peers command shows a list of configured remote peers and their states This command supports the following subcommand option backup Shows a list of configured backup peers The show disw peers backup command allows the following command filter and argument ip addr lt ip addr gt Shows a specific backup peer bas
82. remote source routing networks Use as a value for the MTU the smallest frame size supported on any remote source routing segment in your network You can access and edit the Site Manager parameters DLSw IP Virtual Ring and Virtual Ring MTU through the DLSw Global Parameters window and the BCC parameters virtual ring and virtual ring mtu from the dlsw global prompt 2 4 308622 14 00 Rev 00 DLSw Implementation Notes Note Site Manager requires you to enter a value for the DLSw IP Virtual Ring parameter even if your network includes only Ethernet 802 3 circuits configured for access to DLSw services Count the IP virtual ring as one ring in each source routing segment attached to your TCP IP network You count the IP virtual ring first rather than last to avoid configuring source routing segments that already contain more than 8 ring elements For more information on the DLSw IP Virtual Ring and Virtual Ring MTU parameters see Appendix A Site Manager Parameters DLSw and SRB on a Circuit On an SRB circuit with DLSw services enabled Figure 2 3 the following rules apply e Upon receiving an explorer frame that contains a DLSw specific destination SAP address DLSw and SRB attempt concurrently to locate the requested program entity DLSw searches the network for a route to the target system by forwarding the packet to all local DLSw interfaces and all known remote DLSw routers SRB looks for a bridged pa
83. slot 2 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Data Link Switching Overview 4 IP sends the message to the IP multicast network When the router receives a CANUREACH_ex message on a slot configured with IP the reverse sequence occurs Figure 1 2 1 The router receives a CANUREACH_ex message 2 IP determines that the CANUREACH_ex message is addressed to multicast group 224 0 10 0 IP forwards the message to DLSw on slot 3 4 DLSw converts the CANUREACH_ex message to a TestP message and sends it out a DLSw interface to the receiver TestP CANUREACH_ex Ke Router Receiver Slot Protocol Multicast lt gt 2 IP IP network DVMRP lt gt IP multicast group address 224 0 10 0 DLS0040A Figure 1 2 Receiving a Message Addressed to a Multicast Group You can use Site Manager to specify an IP multicast group address and associate it with a DLSw slot or slots For instructions see Configuring DLSw for IP Multicasting on page 4 47 Sample Connection Using DLSw and IP Multicasting Figure 1 3 shows a pair of routers running DLSw in RFC 2166 mode On router A IP and DVMRP are running on slot 2 and DLSw is running on slot 3 On router B DLSw is running on slot 2 and IP and DVMRP are running on slot 3 308622 14 00 Rev 00 1 9 Configuring DLSw Services Router A connects to end station 1 through a DLSw interface on slot 3 Router A has an IP interface on slot 2 to the IP multicast network Routers B and C a
84. that is already running DLSw complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens 2 Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose Basic Global The DLSw Basic Global Parameter window opens 4 Click on the DLSw RFC Version parameter Click on the Values button Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 4 5 Click on RFC2166 Multicast Click on OK The Values window opens The Initial IGMP Global Configuration window opens if IGMP is not configured 6 Set IGMP global parameters or accept the defaults and click on Save 7 Click on Add The DLSw Multicast Configuration window opens A second DLSw Multicast Configuration window opens 8 Set the following parameters Multicast IP Address e Slot Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 74 9 Click on OK 10 Edit the parameters you want Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 75 The first DLSw Multicast Configuration window reopens 11 Click on Done The Configuration Manager window opens 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 49 Configuring DLSw Services Adding IP Multicasting to Slots ina DLSw Router Running IP Multicast To add IP multicasting to slots in a DLSw router that is already running IP mult
85. the latest version of Nortel Networks BayRS and Site Manager software For information about upgrading BayRS and Site Manager see the upgrading guide for your version of BayRS 308622 14 00 Rev 00 xix Configuring DLSw Services Text Conventions This guide uses the following text conventions angle brackets lt gt bold text italic text screen text separator gt Indicate that you choose the text to enter based on the description inside the brackets Do not type the brackets when entering the command Example If the command syntax is ping lt p_address gt you enter ping 192 32 10 12 Indicates command names and options and text that you need to enter Example Enter show ip alerts routes Example Use the dinfo command Indicates file and directory names new terms book titles and variables in command syntax descriptions Where a variable is two or more words the words are connected by an underscore Example If the command syntax is show at lt valid_route gt valid_route is one variable and you substitute one value for it Indicates system output for example prompts and system messages Example set Trap Monitor Filters Shows menu paths Example Protocols gt IP identifies the IP option on the Protocols menu XX 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Acronyms Preface This guide uses the following acronyms APPN ATM BAN BF BNI BNN CCITT COS DLSw DLCI DLUR
86. to 3600 The default is 30 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 29 Configuring DLSw Services canureach timer 2 lt canureach_timer_2 gt canureach_timer_2 specifies the time interval in seconds after which the router sends a CANUREACH message to the remote DLSw peer to establish a session This parameter becomes active when the canureach timer setting expires The values are 0 to 3600 The default is 30 destination mac lt dest_mac gt dest_mac is the token ring or Ethernet host that the local device will reach using SDLC services The value is any standard 12 digit hexadecimal MSB token ring MAC address destination sap lt dest_sap gt dest_sap is the token ring or Ethernet host that the local device will reach using SDLC services The values are 0x01 to OxFE The default is 0x4 idblock lt idblock gt idblock is the block number which must match the host s IDBLOCK value that identifies incoming connection requests This parameter is used with the pu type idnum and xid format parameters to determine the station exchange identification XID value The block number is any 3 digit hexadecimal value idnum lt idnum gt idnum is the ID number which must match the host s IDNUM value that identifies incoming connection requests This parameter is used with the pu type idblock and xid format parameters to determine the station XID value The ID number is any 5 digit hexadecimal value from 00000 to FFFFF link station address
87. to configure LLC2 SRB and DLSw box token ring 2 1 7 Configure SRB on the token ring interface token ring 2 1 srb interface ring id 0x30 srb token ring 2 1 8 Configure LLC2 on the token ring interface srb token ring 2 1 Ile2 3 6 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Starting DLSw Services Qe 1c2 token ring 2 1 lc2 token ring 2 1 dlsw lsw token ring 2 1 10 Display DLSw default settings Using Site Manager dlsw token ring 2 1 info 1 9 Configure DLSw on the token ring interface To enable DLSw over token ring complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window select the token ring connector on which you are enabling DLSw services The Add Circuit window opens 2 Click on OK The Select Protocols window opens 3 Choose DLSw When you choose DLSw you automatically choose LLC2 The DLSw Basic Global Parameters window opens e 4 Set the following parameters SR Internal LAN ID DLSw RFC Version DLSw Virtual Ring ID hex DLSw Peer IP Address for dual switch networks only Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 4 Note For a description of SR Internal LAN ID see Configuring Bridging Services 5 Click on OK The DLSw Basic Interface window opens continued 308622 14 00 Rev 00 3 7 Configuring DLSw Services
88. traffic to receive higher priority than other traffic 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Data Link Switching Overview Nortel Networks Interoperability The Nortel Networks DLSw implementation is fully interoperable with RFC 1434 RFC 1795 and RFC 2166 DLSw implementations DLSw runs on all Nortel Networks router platforms using local and wide area network facilities including e LLC2 media including Ethernet token ring frame relay and asynchronous transfer mode ATM LAN emulation LANE e Other media using source route bridging SRB formats including Fiber Distributed Data Interface FDDI switched multimegabit data service SMDS frame relay Point to Point PPP and ATM RFC 1483 e Synchronous Data Link Control SDLC links in point to point and multipoint configurations e X 25 links using the Qualified Logical Link Control QLLC protocol You can use DLSw services to support connections between SNA and NetBIOS systems on one type of network such as token ring 802 5 and systems on different types of networks such as token ring 802 5 and frame relay Note In this guide the term local area network LAN refers to all SRB types of LANs and transparent bridge Ethernet 802 3 LANs SRB LANs include but are not limited to token ring 802 5 FDDI Ethernet 802 3 SMDS frame relay and other synchronous media protocols For more information on the media that SRB supports see Configuring Bridging Services RFC 1795 Sup
89. two Nortel Networks routers running DLSw Version 2 0 End station Router Router Host Version 2 0 iP Version 2 0 Ceken ring network A z 5 Ta CANUREACH_ex ee eee re via UDP i a gt TestP ICANREACH_ex TF ea via UDP is eee a eee lt Single TCP connection XIDP aE alll ae establishment Capabilities See Figures C 9 to q echange ge C 12 for more details CANUREACH_cs via TCP TestP ee ere ee gt ICANREACH_cs via TCP oiiaee a SSI lt z REACHACK XIDFRAME XIDP XIDF XIDFRAME o lt _ _ XIDF now ae r et Remaining data flows are the same as in RFC 1795 lt gt DLS0046A Figure C 6 Data Flow for Routers Running DLSw Version 2 0 308622 14 00 Rev 00 C 35 Configuring DLSw Services End station Figure C 7 J Coron ing Figure C 7 shows the data flow between two Nortel Networks routers running DLSw Version 2 0 and RFC 1795 A peer is configured on the router running RFC 1795 Router Version 2 0 I TestP TestF lt XIDP XIDF 3S PS network a nan Dual TCP connection establishment Capabilities exchange CANUREACH_ex via TCP ICANREACH_ex via TCP CANUREACH_cs via TCP ICANREACH_cs via TCP REACHACK XIDFRAME XIDFRAME Remaining data flows are the same as in RFC1795 Router
90. 00s They do not support connections on any LAN media They use the SDLC protocol to communicate PU 2 0 Support PU 2 0 devices include IBM 3174 and 3274 control units Many PC client software packages emulate this PU type PU 2 1 Support PU 2 1 devices include IBM 3174 and 3274 control units These devices may be seen as Advanced Peer to Peer Networking APPN low entry networking nodes PU 4 Support PU 4 devices include IBM 3720 3725 and 3745 front end processors FEPs These FEPs provide enhanced SNA services not provided by routers The router allows connection of the FEPs using SDLC or LLC LAN to LAN SDLC to SDLC LAN to SDLC and SDLC to LAN connections are supported The FEPs communicate using format identifier 4 FID4 data flows FID4 is the SNA protocol format used between two adjacent subarea nodes It is supported by single switch and dual switch operation of DLSw When the router is configured as a primary or secondary SDLC link station the router supports connection to PU 4 nodes in multipoint configurations When the router is configured as a negotiable SDLC link station the router supports connection to PU 4 devices in point to point configurations See SDLC Support on page 1 23 for descriptions of primary secondary and negotiable link stations To configure the router for PU 4 connectivity you use either the Site Manager DLSw Mode and PU Type parameters or the BCC commands mode and pu type For instruc
91. 1740001 destination mac 400037450001 pu name example1 pu type 2 0 xid format fixed idblock 017 idnum a008e local device 2 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring DLSw Services Using Site Manager DLSw uses the SDLC line parameters to determine the characteristics of the link You must set these parameters to allow the router to communicate with the SNA equipment The major parameters are e Clock Source e Internal Clock Speed e Sync Line Coding DLSw uses local device entries to define SDLC attached SNA physical units to the router NetBIOS does not support SDLC attached devices To take advantage of integrated SDLC services in DLSw you must define the SDLC devices that you want to appear as natively attached to the LAN When you define such devices you map the devices to LAN MAC and SAP addresses You can add local devices at the following times e When you add SDLC to a synchronous circuit and add the DLSw protocol to that circuit e When you edit a synchronous circuit that already has SDLC and DLSw on it e When you edit DLSw interface parameters In this case the interface whose parameters you edit must already have at least one local device defined on it Several local device parameters must match other entries in the router or in the attached SDLC device including e Link Station Address hex e PU Type e IDBLOCK e IDNUM e XID Format e Source Virtual MAC hex e Destination Host MAC hex e Source Vi
92. 35 Modem 7934 50 pin to male RS 232 Modem 7936 50 pin to male X 21 Modem 7945 50 pin to female RS 232 No modem 7946 50 pin to female V 35 No modem AA0018005 50 pin to female X 21 No modem Table C 16 Male No Modem Cables Nortel Networks Cable Description Router 7218 15 pin to male RS 232 BLN BCN 7219 15 pin to male V 35 BLN BCN 7833 44 pin to male RS 232 AN ASN 7834 44 pin to male V 35 AN ASN 308622 14 00 Rev 00 C 31 Configuring DLSw Services Flowcharts End station Figure C 3 Figure C 3 shows the data flow between two Nortel Networks routers running RFC 1434 for PU 2 0 over LLC Router RFC 1434 TestP TestF Null XIDP Null XIDF XID T2 SABME UA RR IP network Dual TCP connection establishment _ _ p CANUREACH ICANREACH REACHACK XIDFRAME XIDFRAME XIDFRAME T2 CONTACT CONTACTED Router RFC 1434 Null XIDF lt _______ Host TestP TestF Null XIDP XID T2 SABME UA RNR RR DLS0043A Data Flow for Routers Running RFC 1434 PU 2 0 over LLC C 32 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Troubleshooting DLSw Networks Figure C 4 shows the data flow between two Nortel Networks routers running RFC 1434 for PU 2 1 over LLC End station Router RFC 1434 Ceren ng gt es TestP TestF Null XIDP Null XIDF XID T2 1 req lt l
93. 4 35 A 59 A 60 Backup Config parameter A 48 A 76 Backup End Time hhmm parameter A 78 Backup End Time parameter A 50 Backup Hold Down Time sec parameter A 77 Backup Hold Down Time parameter A 49 Backup Incoming Bandwidth parameter A 57 Backup Incoming Burst Size parameters A 57 Backup IP Address parameter A 48 A 76 Backup Max Up Time parameter A 49 A 77 Backup Outgoing Bandwidth parameter A 56 Backup Outgoing Burst Size parameter A 57 Backup Peer Type parameter A 76 backup peers 1 42 4 19 Backup Start Time hhmm parameter A 78 Backup Start Time parameter A 50 BAN 1 30 BAN2 termination Ban2 Termination Support parameter A 25 configuring 4 63 description of 1 33 Ban2 Termination Support parameter A 25 BNN 1 29 boundary function DLSw APPN 1 35 bridging services source routing 2 6 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Index translation bridge 2 7 translation bridge on an SRB circuit 2 5 transparent bridge 2 6 broadcast peers 4 19 C Canureach Retries parameter A 38 Canureach Retries2 parameter A 39 Canureach Timer parameter A 38 Canureach Timer2 parameter A 39 Circuit Number parameter A 70 configuration objects for SDLC operation 4 25 congestion control DLSw prioritization 2 20 conventions text xx customer support xxiv D Default Bandwidths parameter A 89 Default MAC Peer IP Address parameter A 68 default MAC peer IP entries adding A 65 default MAC peer IP table par
94. 47483647 bytes Specifies the burst size amount in bytes for the incoming DLSw traffic to use in RSVP reservations for this peer Type a value in the range 1 to 2147483647 or accept the default 0 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 24 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Non Peak Outgoing Bandwidth Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table gt DLSw RSVP 0 0 to 2147483647 b s Specifies the bandwidth amount b s for the outgoing DLSw traffic to use in RSVP reservations for this peer during non peak hours Type a value in the range 1 to 2147483647 or accept the default 0 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 25 Non Peak Outgoing Burst Size Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table gt DLSw RSVP 0 0 to 2147483647 bytes Specifies the burst size amount in bytes for the outgoing DLSw traffic to use in RSVP reservations for this peer during non peak hours Type a value in the range 1 to 2147483647 or accept the default 0 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 26 Non Peak Incoming Bandwidth Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table gt DLSw RSVP 0 0 to 2147483647 b s Specifies the bandwidth amount b s for the in
95. 5 1 5 1 21 Max Queue Size for Unconfig Peers Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Prot Prioritization Outbound gt Global 16000 5000 to 2147483647 bytes Specifies the maximum size in bytes of each default queue Enter a number of bytes to increase or decrease the default queue size of 16000 bytes 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 22 A 88 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Default Bandwidths Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Prot Prioritization Outbound gt Global 60 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O Ten entries one per queue of a percentage between 0 and 100 Determines the number of default queues and allocates the bandwidth for each Either accept the default of 60 percent in QO and 40 percent in Q1 or enter up to 10 values one for each queue Separate each bandwidth percent with a comma The bandwidth percentages must total 100 percent On low speed lines running NetBIOS you should allocate 20 percent of the total bandwidth due to end station timing For example the following allots 10 percent of the bandwidth to each of 10 queues 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 19 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 89 Configuring DLSw Services Peer Queue Configuration Parameters The Peer Queue Configuration window Figure A 30 summarizes the priority queue status for all
96. 5 5 1 20 Outgoing Bandwidth Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table gt DLSw RSVP 0 0 to 2147483647 bits per second b s Specifies the bandwidth amount b s for the outgoing DLSw traffic to use in RSVP reservations for this peer Type a value in the range 1 to 2147483647 or accept the default 0 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 21 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Outgoing Burst Size Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table gt DLSw RSVP 0 0 to 2147483647 bytes Specifies the burst size amount in bytes for the outgoing DLSw traffic to use in RSVP reservations for this peer Type a value in the range 1 to 2147483647 or accept the default 0 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 22 Incoming Bandwidth Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table gt DLSw RSVP 0 0 to 2147483647 b s Specifies the bandwidth amount b s for the incoming DLSw traffic to use in RSVP reservations for this peer Type a value in the range 1 to 2147483647 or accept the default 0 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 23 Incoming Burst Size Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table gt DLSw RSVP 0 0 to 21
97. 59 Configuring MAC Address Translation P E E E ReeeneeaTs Soe 4 59 Goniiguring BAN 2 Termination 45 ssacseidsssaansied prec aa A Gonigurino DLW PTW ZAIN onsin baiarvusssGuancsseccdorausaessvarxdewendtudactuad sui E AAND E 4 64 Contigua Default Prionty QUSUGS siriiiasssirnosi es cence saealecteas vie asaina 4 64 Enabling the Default Queues for Configured and Unconfigured Peers 4 65 Customizing the Default Queue Configuration EE i enui 4 65 Configuring Peer Specific Priority QUEUS scccciaccsciseressccscsesdsindateetatedardedersenteeassctence 4 66 Priority Queues for a Specific DLSw Peer occ cccceascseseessensenancesennenees 4 67 Enabling or Disabling a Single Peer s Priority Queues rere ET i 4 68 Customizing Specific DLSw Peer QUEUES ec eesesceeneeeeeereneteanecenesseetenees 4 68 Creating DLS Pirie FINKE serra nusaccs Got sive cneau iania a iaai 4 69 Appendix A Site Manager Parameters Using the Parameter DeSCriptions cccceccceecceeeeceeeceeeeceacecaeesaeeseneesaeeseeeseeeeeeasenaees A 2 DLSw Basic Global Parameters eer arena meee ee meee eer one PEO DiSw Basic imenasa Parainietere sascha caetintidatrlinpaAecasiar a eat A A 8 DLSw Advanced Global Parameters seccctii as cciicnuisieesieuds oiasieoniaen ieee ete A 10 DLSw Advanced Interface Configuration Parameters cceccceeeesteeeeeeeeseteeeeneeeees A 26 Adding Local Device Configuration Parameters cccc
98. 6 Click on OK The DLSw NetBIOS Peer Configuration window opens 7 Click on Done The Configuration Manager window opens Editing a DLSw Default NetBIOS Peer IP Table Entry The following sections describe how to edit a DLSw default NetBIOS peer IP table entry using the BCC or Site Manager Using the BCC To change the IP address for a NetBIOS peer navigate to the netbios peer prompt for example box dlsw netbios peer lt name gt and enter peer ip addr lt peer_ip_adadr gt peer_ip_adadr is the IP address of the DLSw peer that can reach the remote NetBIOS client server or application named in the same DLSw default NetBIOS peer IP table entry The value is any 32 bit IP address in the form network host using dotted decimal notation For example to change the IP address to 1 2 3 4 enter netbios peer boston peer ip addr 1 2 3 4 netbios peer boston 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 37 Configuring DLSw Services Using Site Manager You can edit only the Default NetBIOS Peer IP Address parameter in a default NetBIOS peer IP table entry To edit the parameter complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Protocols menu opens choose Protocols 2 Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose Default NetBIOS The DLSw NetBIOS Peer Configuration window opens 4 Click on the default NetBIOS peer that you want to ed
99. A 7 SRB and DLSw 2 2 subsystems and DLSw 2 2 support Nortel Networks xxiv synchronous pass through 1 27 Index 5 T TCP Inact Method parameter A 24 TCP Inact Time parameter A 24 TCP Window Size parameter A 13 TCP IP DLSw communications over 1 16 technical publications xxiv technical support xxiv Technician Interface A 2 template flt file editing 4 69 sample 4 69 TEST frames 2 6 text conventions XX Token ring to Ethernet topology considerations A 16 traffic filters DLSw and outbound 1 43 outbound DLSw priority outbound filters A 94 media and protocols supported 2 14 Translated Destination MAC Address parameter A 85 A 86 translation bridge support 2 7 transparent bridge support 2 6 Transport Type parameter A 47 U UDP explorer frames 1 5 4 19 unconfigured peers 4 20 V Virtual Ring MTU parameter 2 4 A 16 Ww weighted dequeuing algorithm 2 18 window size SAP A 62 X XID Format parameter A 35 Index 6 308622 14 00 Rev 00
100. ANREACH ICANREACH TEST Rsp gt lt RRRR REACHACK REACHACK C C XIDFRAME null lt xXID null req XIDFRAME null lt RR RR gt _ lt SNRM See note 3 Set_Mode_Rev eal le XIDFRAME null XID null rsp s XIDFRAME null lt RR RR gt rr XIDFRAME T2 XIDFRAME T2 0 OAU o lt XIDT2 0 OANE UE CONTACT SABME gt CONTACT RR RR gt a a UA CONTACTED RNR lt _ __ _ RR gt Set_Mode_Send RNR lt _UA er A lt RR RR lt Connect_Rev RR Req CONTACTED lt RA RR 0 gt Connect_Rev __ Rsp lt RR RR gt FRAMES iINFOFRAMES lt I FRAMES gt INFOFRAMES l FRAMES Figure C 13 Notes 1 If enabled Preactivation frames are sent here 2 All events in italics are internal to the router 3 The Host may send SNRM several times prior to the one shown here This is the first time that the router will accept it DLS0053A Primary to Secondary SDLC Data Flow Using Single Switch SNA Frame Relay C 42 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Host Router Single switch DLSw SDLC to Frame relay eE T REG_Req REG_Rsp Frame relay network ea See note 2 Figure C 14 Notes 1 If enabled Preactivation frames are sent here CANUREACH TEST Cmd eer eee ICANREACH
101. AP Table 10 6 to 200 Specifies the maximum number of unacknowledged LLC2 frames that the local end station DLSw switch accepts for forwarding to the remote end station For more information see the section Flow Control on page page 2 12 Enter a SAP window size that is appropriate for your network configuration and requirements Specifying a larger size dedicates more buffer space to a particular SAP thereby improving performance on that SAP Specifying a smaller window size reduces buffer size and decreases performance on that SAP 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 4 1 3 Note The default value of 10 frames is based on the commonly used value of 7 plus additional frames to accommodate possible differences in timing between the router and the end stations With large numbers of PUs you may need to increase this value Adding DLSw Default NetBIOS Peer IP Table Entry Parameters The DLSw NetBIOS Configuration window Figure A 16 contains parameters that allow you to add entries to the DLSw default NetBIOS peer IP table This table lists all remote NetBIOS systems and applications that you can access via DLSw connection services on the local router Each entry that you define in the default NetBIOS peer IP table associates the name of a NetBIOS client or server with the IP address of the remote DLSw peer that can reach that client or server 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions
102. Address Translation Table gt Add Default None Options Standard MSB Token Ring MAC addresses Function Specifies the originally configured MAC address of the destination station Instructions Enter the MAC address of the destination station MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 16 1 2 A 84 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Translated Destination MAC Address Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt MAC Address Translation Table gt Add Default None Options Standard MSB Token Ring MAC addresses Function Specifies the translated MAC address of the destination station Instructions Enter the MAC address to which you want the original MAC address translated MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 16 1 3 DLSw MAC Address Translation Table The DLSw MAC Address Translation Table window Figure A 28 allows you to edit the translated destination MAC address for the original MAC address you select Original MAC Address 0x000001010101 Translated Destination MAC Address OxEFFFE964008B3E Figure A 28 DLSw MAC Address Translation Table Window 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 85 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Translated Destination MAC Address Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt MAC Address Translation Table Default None Options Standard MSB Token Ring MAC addresses Function Specifies the translated MAC address of the destination station Instructions Enter the MAC
103. BM S 390 Both routers are configured for DLSw dual switch The routers are connected to the OSA 2 adapter on the IBM host using an ATM switch The adapter is configured with ATM token ring LANE H PC Router A Router B ATM switch osi DLSw SRB LLC TCP IP PPP TCP IP PPP Fat ag OSA 2 adapter LANE configured with ATM token ring LANE DLSO060A Figure 1 11 DLSw Dual Switch over ATM LANE Token Ring Using TCP IP LLC Support Logical Link Control LLC is a standard protocol within the CCITT now ITU T 8802 2 and IEEE 802 x family of LAN standards Connection oriented protocols including IBM SNA and NetBIOS use LLC services Connection oriented protocols do not have a network layer address such as an IP subnet to route information Instead before any information transfer occurs a device on the network sends a broadcast or explorer frame to locate the session partner From this broadcast the network establishes a path for the data transfer SNA needs a connection oriented data link layer for end to end packet sequencing and error control Over wide area networks SDLC has traditionally met this need However in a LAN environment FEPs controllers and NetBIOS client server stations commonly use an LLC2 layer for this purpose To support communication among these devices you can add LLC2 interfaces to a router configuration when configuring DLSw LLC is supported on the router with PU 2
104. Backup Peer Parameters ccccccseceeeeeteeeeeeesesteeeteeeeseereeee ACT4 DLSw RSVP Global Parameters 0 cccescceeeeeeeeeeeees obrei T Ne eas A 79 Adding MAC Address Translation Parameters 2 cecccccesseeceeeeeeseaeeeeneeeseaaeeeeneeeeees A 84 DLSw MAC Address Translation Table cccccccsceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaaeeseeeeeseaeeneneees A 85 Global DLSw Protocol Priority Parameters wee Berens E E E opnehes A 86 Peer Queue Configuration Parameters ccccccccsesesceeceeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeetaesesseeeettateteereeee ACQO Adding Gueuse PPR AI FS icanon conan Sts sap nen aaia aE Sano sleds inside A A 92 DLS Priority PIS Pater BS osese taeda carcinoid pase daeveniee A 93 Appendix B Criteria for DLSw Prioritization Predefined DLSw Criteria PERTE tre settee sakes P PE B 2 DLSw Reference Pais sapusiisnnienisinehamniaarteniap imate nabAenaeriiennes B 3 Specifying MAC Address Ranges scot scenes nraserntsenserseminsesdensduusniasnnuartduononse B 4 Source Routing Bridge Source MAC Addresses cceccccesesseeeeeesnneeeeseenaeeeeesenaas B 4 Source Routing Bridge Functional MAC Addresses cecccceecseseeeesetseeesssseeeees B 5 Specifying Source and Destination SAP Code Ranges 006 E EE B 6 x 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Appendix C Troubleshooting DLSw Networks Wien Me DLOW LOG sce siccsnnesacansanievaseteneriaccetamnecisaaeateeseitdauepedae EEOSE C 1 riaisiinig E
105. BayRS Version 14 00 Part No 308622 14 00 Rev 00 September 1999 4401 Great America Parkway Santa Clara CA 95054 Configuring DLSw Services NORTEL NETWORKS Copyright 1999 Nortel Networks All rights reserved Printed in the USA September 1999 The information in this document is subject to change without notice The statements configurations technical data and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable but are presented without express or implied warranty Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks NA Inc The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement and may only be used in accordance with the terms of that license A summary of the Software License is included in this document Trademarks NORTEL NETWORKS is a trademark of Nortel Networks Bay Networks AN BCN and BLN are registered trademarks and Advanced Remote Node ASN BayRS and BCC are trademarks of Nortel Networks All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners Restricted Rights Legend Use duplication or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 Notwithstanding any other lice
106. Cct Configuration Window Circuit Number Configuration Manager gt DLSw gt Boundary Function gt Add VCCT gt No None 1 to 1024 Allows you to specify an existing virtual circuit Type a number from 1 to 1024 N A A 70 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Slot Number Path Configuration Manager gt DLSw gt Boundary Function gt Add VCCT gt No Default None Options 1 to 14 Function Allows you to specify the slot for the virtual circuit you created The slot you choose for the virtual circuit must be the same slot on which DLSw and APPN are running Instructions Type a slot number from 1 to 14 depending on the e Type of node chassis e Slots that link modules can occupy MIB Object ID N A Enabling VCCT Global Parameter The Edit VCCT Global Parameters window Figure A 22 contains the Enable parameter which allows you to enable or disable all virtual circuits Enable Figure A 22 Edit VCCT Global Parameters Window 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 71 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Enable Path Configuration Manager gt DLSw gt Boundary Function gt Global Default Enable Options Enable Disable Function Allows you to enable or disable all virtual circuits on the router Instructions Accept the default Enable or select Disable MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 24 1 2 Enabling VCCT Interface Parameter The VCCT circuits window Figure A 23 contains the Ena
107. DDO si tecciccesneaciaanateidaceteatationneanteiccelatariasesdnmradhcucamrckecasmasiereanete 1 24 CIE SDLG PMN xe sdibsesa dawrssin ani annaas AE ASNE ASASEN 1 25 Combining Primary and Secondary SDLC otoit AET Perr opagun 1 27 Naggiahie SDLG SUPPO raira E T priming bined 1 27 Pane Relay PAT annan ies aiinia duniiiedumsieetiasudoantlod 1 28 Boundary Network Node RFO 1490 ciciren aseainena 1 29 Boundary Access Node RFC 1490 secionissisninainaiii i 1 30 MAC Address Translation setts mimes iets aaraa ebret enacts aeg T ee IPO BANZ Ter inh ssevcnccenscr ceed enierdacteestvcuadutentead a aA 1 33 GLEC USB aaiae aa A 1 34 DLSWAFFN Boundary FUNCION scrisese i eN 1 35 DLSWAPPN Network Configurations ssrsieissininosiiiinnin a S00 LV FCM HIS sca ds Starnes inian aana aE AAE NEA AAAA 1 36 RFG 2205 SVP DUDO aoaiina e a a a ie dee 1 39 CG onigarmg DLSwW RSVP Parametets wii tice atv a aT 1 39 Sri RSUP sanimi na eN PE EPE E E E T 1 40 pec ii DLOW TAIG aserite a a S area ear ane aR 1 42 DLSW Backup Peer SUPPONI morcosan iiaa kanin inaa aa aa a Aa a 1 42 DLSw Filtering U OEN AT E T Ra aas ES ee sate sane 1 43 Si POZO ar a aca eiaetee eaten haved anaes E 1 43 Frotocol Prone OR sos scott sacs pacti ca cece ca atvnkcte ca E RA 1 44 Chapter 2 DLSw Implementation Notes DLSW and Olber SEY IONE swisi iniaiaiai uaea ainan a aa NG 2 2 Combining DLSw and SRB ete ais eE PTA ET IE T 2 2 vi 308622 14 00 Rev 00 voa
108. DLSw Each router maintains an independent list of DLSw SAP addresses in a global DLSw SAP table Each DLSw SAP table entry has a unique hexadecimal value The default SAP table includes SAPs 00 04 08 and OC hexadecimal which is sufficient for most SNA applications To support NetBIOS edit the DLSw NetBIOS Support parameter and specify Yes to add SAP FO to the table Figure 4 2 shows a sample network with three routers running DLSw This network uses the following values in the SAP tables 4 4 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services e Router A the central site router supports both SNA and NetBIOS traffic SNA session traffic uses SAP 04 and NetBIOS traffic uses FO Additionally SNA requires SAP 00 for session initiation These hexadecimal values 00 04 FO must exist in the SAP table e Router B the remote site supports NetBIOS traffic only SAP FO is the only required entry in the SAP table By default the SAPs 0x04 0x08 and Ox0C appear in the table e Router C a regional site supports SNA traffic only In this example SNA requires SAPs 00 and 04 in the SAP table Note that SNA traffic can use other SAPs Most SNA traffic uses SAP 04 Router A 192 32 10 1 LAN NetBIOS gateway Mainframe server SS TY pi pan PONE as NetBIOS client ean PPP AS 400 192 32 20 2 Router C
109. DLSw services on the router Enter 0 to disable MAC caching 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 11 NetBIOS Cache Age secs Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Advanced gt Global 300 21 to 4294967295 s Specifies the maximum number of seconds that inactive NetBIOS names can exist in the NetBIOS to DLSw peer mapping cache Enter an interval to limit the amount of memory that inactive NetBIOS cache entries consume for DLSw services on the router 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 12 Reject Unconfigured Peers Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Advanced gt Global Accept Accept Reject Specifies whether DLSw peers in this router should allow Accept or disallow Reject TCP sessions with other DLSw peers not defined in the DLSw peer table Select Accept if you want to allow TCP sessions with Nortel Networks or other DLSw peers not defined in the peer table Select Reject if you want to disallow TCP sessions with Nortel Networks or other DLSw peers not defined in the peer table Disallowing TCP sessions prevents the router from learning the IP addresses of other peers in the network 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 13 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID DLSw RFC Version Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt
110. E FURTHER AGREES THAT THIS AGREEMENT IS THE ENTIRE AND EXCLUSIVE AGREEMENT BETWEEN NORTEL NETWORKS AND LICENSEE WHICH SUPERSEDES ALL PRIOR ORAL AND WRITTEN AGREEMENTS AND COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN THE PARTIES PERTAINING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS AGREEMENT NO DIFFERENT OR ADDITIONAL TERMS WILL BE ENFORCEABLE AGAINST NORTEL NETWORKS UNLESS NORTEL NETWORKS GIVES ITS EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT INCLUDING AN EXPRESS WAIVER OF THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT iv 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Contents Preface ETE e eee ee ee T ere eet eer eee E rear ery meee rrr mere nar ere re cere xix Mice dg Ree alc G1 geeemeer er ener nec ree tree re nerr a te eer rere rrr Tree XX PAC MOINS dace cisesiestna masini naa iat ae naa nee xxi aee EUS UM a A A E A A E A E T A xxiii Fon to Gor HEI soaren niae E a n a r xxiv Chapter 1 Data Link Switching Overview LSW OMI LI IGN sparno a N A 1 2 Nortel Networks DLSw Implementation cceccccceeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeees 1 2 Nortel Networks Interoperability i uiseks cs nodrectereadinaasiionaustanicruedemiuarmdacns 1 3 REG EPS UO aimacion er eran ad be Nees aedaaete test 1 3 Differences Between RFC 1795 and RFC 1434 oo eecceceeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeseeneees 1 4 BLSW Version 2 Unleast UDP SUPPOTI 2s scent cnniecscssta Waieteaestdensolateatennia e eini 1 4 UDF EX DIORGP FIATO S saccra o A 1 5 TOR UDP and Unknown Peer Types iis teisindcsasn croiunnrecaioutaieriinioniihieeinins 1 6 Single TCP IP Connec
111. EBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 18 SSP ICANREACH new connection frame received connection 31619ea0 479 07 12 95 08 48 08 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 18 SSP ICANREACH connection frame received connection 31619ea0 480 07 12 95 08 48 08 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 18 SSP ICANREACH in SDLC frame received connection 31619ea0 Router B returns a REACHACK acknowledgment frame to router A Router B forwards an XIDFRAME NULL to router A Router A sends a NULL XID P to the host The host returns a NULL XID F frame to router A which forwards an XIDFRAME NULL packet to router B 481 07 12 95 08 48 08 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 45 SSP XID frame rcvd in SDLC conn state flag 31619ea0 4 1 308622 14 00 Rev 00 C 13 Configuring DLSw Services Router B generates and sends an XIDFRAME T2 to router A Router A sends an XID T2 P to the host The host computer generates an SABME frame and sends it to router A Router A returns UA and RNR frames back to the host Router A then contacts router B Router B accepts the CONTACT frame causing a state change Router B sends the Set Mode indication SNRM frame to SDLC 482 07 12 95 08 48 08 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 45 SSP contact frame rcvd in SDLC conn state flag 31619ea0 4 1 483 07 12 95 08 48 08 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 16 State change in ssp_contact conn 31619ea0 old state 4 new state 3 484 07 12 95 08 48 08 DEBUG SLOT 1 SDLC
112. Ethernet interface you first configure DLSw global attributes Then you configure LLC2 and DLSw on that interface For example to configure DLSw on an Ethernet interface with default settings navigate in configuration mode to the top level box prompt 1 Configure DLSw global attributes box disw dlsw 2 Specify a slot for the IP interface and the IP address to use for TCP connections based on this slot For example to configure slot 3 with an IP address of 1 1 1 3 enter dlsw slot ip 3 ip addr 1 1 1 3 slot ip 3 3 Return to the box level prompt slot ip 3 box box 4 Specify an Ethernet interface on which you want to configure LLC2 and DLSw box ethernet 3 2 5 Configure LLC2 on the Ethernet interface ethernet 3 2 Ile2 6 Configure DLSw on the Ethernet interface llc2 ethernet3 2 dlsw 7 Display DLSw default settings dlsw ethernet 3 2 info 3 4 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Using Site Manager Starting DLSw Services To enable DLSw over Ethernet complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window select the Ethernet connector on which you are enabling DLSw services The Add Circuit window opens Click on OK The Select Protocols window opens 3 Choose DLSw When you choose DLSw you automatically choose LLC2 The DLSw Basic Global Parameters window opens Set the following par
113. Event Code 11 DLC_IF_SET_MODE_SEND_MSG SDLC acknowledges the Set Mode indication UA 485 07 12 95 08 48 08 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 73 received SET_MODE response from SDLC port 3171lad50 ls_ref 3171 e230 The DLSw circuit reaches the CONNECTED state Router A and router B return receiver ready RR packets to their clients 486 07 12 95 08 48 08 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 16 State change in sdlc_connected conn 31619ea0 old state 3 new tate 1 Disconnecting from the Network This section provides some sample log messages that can occur when you disconnect from a DLSw network Included is a description of each event followed by the actual log message s A local end station disconnects and generates a DISCONNECT frame The DISCONNECT frame causes a state change to DISCONNECTED The local router sends the DISCONNECT frame to the remote router 18 04 25 95 22 43 09 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 17 LLC DISC frame received 19 04 25 95 22 43 09 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 16 State change in llc_disc_ind conn 30927f 70 old state 1 new state 11 C 14 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Troubleshooting DLSw Networks The remote router issues a DL_HALTED frame and sends it to the local router 20 04 25 95 22 43 09 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 45 SSP dl_halted frame rcvd in LLC conn state flag 30927f70 b 0 T
114. ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID DLSw NetBIOS Support Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Basic Global No Yes No Specifies whether this router supports NetBIOS traffic and adds the NetBIOS service access point SAP entry OxFO to the SAP table Click on Values and select Yes or No If you specify Yes the software automatically adds the SAP OxFO to the SAP table N A DLSw RSVP Support Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Basic Global Disabled Disabled Enabled Specifies whether DLSw on this router can use RSVP To use this parameter set the DLSw RFC Version parameter to either V2 0 Unicast or RFC2166 Multicast Then click on Values and select Enabled or Disabled 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 37 DLSw Peer IP Address add only Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Basic Global 0 0 0 0 Any valid 32 bit IP unicast address of the form network host using dotted decimal notation The valid ranges are 0 0 0 0 through 223 255 255 255 and 240 0 0 0 through 255 255 255 255 Specifies the IP address of a remote DLSw peer Once added to the DLSw peer table this address defines a configured peer on the local router Configured peers receive all DLSw related broadcast frames for a given router or network processor Enter the IP address at which the configured peer will receive all DLSw related broadcast frames 1 3
115. IP address of the DLSw peer to which this NetBIOS device is connected e Default MAC peer IP table Contains the list of all remote SNA systems and applications that you can access by DLSw connection services on the local router Each entry contains a MAC address and the IP address of a DLSw peer that can forward packets to this MAC address In the local router s default NetBIOS peer IP table enter the IP address of the remote peer associated with any remote NetBIOS application that you need to reach through DLSw services Each entry in this table associates the name of a NetBIOS client or server with the IP address of the remote DLSw peer that can reach that client or server In the router s default MAC peer IP table enter the peer IP address of the DLSw peer associated with any remote SNA system or application that you need to reach through DLSw services Each entry in this table associates the MAC address for an SNA system with the IP address of the DLSw peer that can reach that system Unlike dynamically learned entries statically defined entries remain until you delete them from the default NetBIOS peer IP table or the default MAC peer IP table 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 35 Configuring DLSw Services Adding a DLSw Default NetBIOS Peer IP Table Entry The following sections describe how to add a DLSw default NetBIOS peer IP table entry using the BCC or Site Manager Using the BCC To add a new DLSw default NetBIOS peer IP t
116. Is ref 32 0x80000000 TCP Protocol Priority DLS RFC 2166 Events multicast 8 0x00000100 QLLC and VCCT Events qllc vcct 9 0x00000200 No Bits none 0 0x0 All Debug Flags all all bits Oxffffffff This section provides general information about DLSw states and events as Using and Decoding the DLSw Log described in RFC 1434 and RFC 1795 DLSw states and events appear as numbers within the text of logged messages If a message contains the text old state 3 new state 1 the numbers 3 and 1 point to specific conditions in the DLSw state table Similarly a message containing the text event 3 points to a specific condition in the DLSw event table 308622 14 00 Rev 00 C 3 Configuring DLSw Services Table C 3 lists the DLSw state names and numbers Table C 4 lists the DLSw events and numbers Refer to these tables when decoding messages in the DLSw log Table C 3 DLSw State Table State Name State Number CONNECTED 1 CONNECT PENDING 2 CONTACT PENDING 3 CIRCUIT ESTABLISHED 4 CIRCUIT PENDING 5 CIRCUIT RESTART 6 HALT PENDING 7 DISCONNECTED 11 DISCONNECT PENDING 12 RESTART PENDING 13 RESOLVE PENDING 14 CIRCUIT START 15 HALT PENDING NO ACK 16 C 4 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Troubleshooting DLSw Networks Table C 4 DLSw Event Table Event Number Event in decimal format CANUREACH Received 3 ICANREACH Received 4
117. LSw Services 1 42 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Data Link Switching Overview DLSw Filtering Nortel Networks provides two prioritization mechanisms that affect DLSw traffic e DLSw prioritization e Protocol prioritization DLSw Prioritization DLSw prioritization allows you to prioritize traffic within DLSw based on predefined or user defined fields Examples of DLSw prioritization criteria include e Source and destination service access point SAP Use this field to assign NetBIOS traffic SAP OxFO to a lower priority than SNA traffic e Source and destination MAC address Use this field to provide host bound traffic preference over other traffic e Any field in the SNA transmission header TH and response request header R RH Use this field to provide class of service COS priority preference You can also prioritize traffic based on any values within the headers and data packets For information on implementing DLSw prioritization on a Bay Networks router see Chapter 2 DLSw Implementation Notes For instructions on configuring DLSw prioritization see Chapter 4 Customizing DLSw Services 308622 14 00 Rev 00 1 43 Configuring DLSw Services Protocol Prioritization You can use protocol prioritization to transmit DLSw traffic ahead of other traffic on an individual synchronous line interface You can prioritize specific types of DLSw traffic such as Ethernet Frame relay SDLC Token ring O
118. Networks service program contact one of the following Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Centers Technical Solutions Center Telephone Number Billerica MA 800 2LANWAN 800 252 6926 Santa Clara CA 800 2LANWAN 800 252 6926 Valbonne France 33 4 92 96 69 68 Sydney Australia 61 2 9927 8800 Tokyo Japan 81 3 5402 7041 xxiv 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Chapter 1 Data Link Switching Overview This chapter includes the following information about data link switching DLSw services Topic Page DLSw Networking Overview 1 2 REC 1795 Support 1 3 DLSw Version 2 Unicast UDP Support 1 4 REC 2166 Multicast Support 1 6 DLSw Single Switch and Dual Switch Services 1 11 SNA PU Descriptions CEFA OSA 2 ATM Adapter Support for SNA Connectivity 1 20 LLC Support 1 22 DL r 1 2 Frame Relay Support 1 28 MAC Address Translation 1 30 BAN2 Termination 1 33 QLLC Support 1 34 DLSw APPN Boundary Function 1 35 REC 2205 RSVP Support 1 39 DLSw Backup Peer Support 1 42 DLSw Filtering 1 43 308622 14 00 Rev 00 1 1 Configuring DLSw Services You should review this chapter if you are responsible for configuring DLSw on one or more Nortel Networks routers If you are already familiar with DLSw concepts you can go directly to Chapter 2 DLSw Implementation Notes for more detailed information about DLSw on Nortel Networks rou
119. P IP network that complies with RFC 1434 RFC 1795 or DLSw Version 2 0 You define each configured peer by specifying its unique IP address on the TCP IP network With RFCs 1434 and 1795 once you initialize DLSw services the local router establishes two TCP connections one for transmitting one for receiving between each local DLSw capable slot and every configured peer in the TCP IP network Remote DLSw peers on the network follow the same procedure DLSw uses TCP ports 2065 and 2067 Peer Types For DLSw Version 2 0 you can define a specific transport type to a DLSw peer specifically e TCP e UDP e Unknown 4 18 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services Peers that you define as TCP or UDP will cause the local router to use TCP or UDP explorer frames respectively and exclusively to establish connections with the peer router A peer that you define as Unknown causes the local router to use UDP explorer frames to locate the destination MAC address of the peer before establishing the TCP connection If the TCP connection cannot be made or if there is no UDP response DLSw performs fallback attempts to earlier RFC protocols to establish the connection If all connection attempts fail regardless of the RFC used a connection can be made to a configured DLSw backup peer described in the next section For information about configuring peer types and fallback attempts see the Transport Type and SNA Fallback Attempts param
120. P connection is established when you start the local router If the peer type is UDP a TCP connection occurs only after the UDP explorer frames are correctly exchanged For information about the Transport Type and SNA Fallback Attempts parameters refer to Appendix A Site Manager Parameters Single TCP IP Connection To transport data DLSw Version 2 uses a single full duplex TCP session instead of two half duplex sessions thereby reducing the amount of time and memory used to make the TCP connection RFC 2166 Multicast Support In addition to IP unicast broadcast services DLSw provides IP multicast support The capability to send and receive both IP multicast and unicast traffic makes the Nortel Networks implementation of DLSw fully compliant with RFC 2166 RFC 2166 is an implementation of DLSw developed by the APPN Implementors Workshop a consortium of vendors RFC 2166 improves scalability by allowing you to do the following e Send the initial session establishment request CanuReach using multicast IP e Use only single bidirectional TCP connections e Establish and disconnect TCP connections on demand and as needed For diagnostic purposes RFC 2166 also provides reason codes with the HALT_DL and HALT_DL_NOACK SSP messages 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Data Link Switching Overview Differences Between RFC 2166 and RFC 1795 Comparing RFC 2166 with earlier DLSw RFCs 1434 and 1795 shows how RFC 2166 reduces the amoun
121. PN 4 43 Step 2 Creating a Virtual Circuit and Adding a DLSw Interface 4 44 Step 3 Obtaining the Virtual Circuit Number 4 45 Step 4 Adding an APPN Interface to an Existing Virtual Circuit 4 46 Disabling and Reenabling the Boundary Function 4 46 Step 1 Configuring DLSw and APPN Before you can configure the DLSw boundary function DLSw and APPN must be running on the same slot on the router Using Site Manager 1 Configure DLSw on a slot For instructions see Chapter 3 Starting DLSw Services 2 Configure APPN on the same slot as DLSw Set the Max Send BTU Size and Max Receive BTU Size APPN advanced port parameters Set these parameters according to the size supported by the end device If you enable high performance routing HPR support set these parameters to 768 or greater If you use DLUR you must supply information for the following APPN advanced global parameters e Default dependent logical unit server DLUS Name e Default Backup DLUS Name Also the DLSw APPN boundary function requires a setting of Enable for the Implicit DLUR parameter When you configure the DLSw APPN boundary function Site Manager automatically sets the Implicit DLUR parameter to Enable Make sure that this parameter is properly set For information on configuring APPN see Configuring APPN Services 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 43 Configuring DLSw Services Step 2 Creating a Virtual Circuit and Adding a DLSw Interface To create a virtu
122. RSVP Global 0 0 to 2147483647 b s Specifies the bandwidth amount b s for the outgoing DLSw traffic to use in RSVP reservations for unconfigured peers or peers that will use global parameters during non peak hours Type a value in the range 1 to 2147483647 or accept the default 0 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 42 Non Peak Outgoing Burst Size Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt DLSw RSVP Global 0 0 to 2147483647 bytes Specifies the burst size amount in bytes for the outgoing DLSw traffic to use in RSVP reservations for unconfigured peers or peers that will use global parameters during non peak hours Type a value in the range 1 to 2147483647 or accept the default 0 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 43 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Non Peak Incoming Bandwidth Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt DLSw RSVP Global 0 0 to 2147483647 b s Specifies the bandwidth amount b s for the incoming DLSw traffic to use in RSVP reservations for unconfigured peers or peers that will use global parameters during non peak hours Type a value in the range 1 to 2147483647 or accept the default 0 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 44 Non Peak Incoming Burst Si
123. SA 2 ATM interface You use the OSA to establish SNA sessions over ATM between clients and IBM hosts When you set up your SNA network to use OSA 2 over ATM you e Configure and store several parameters in the IBM Host Configuration Dataset file for instructions see the documentation that came with your IBM host e Load the IBM host configuration onto the OSA 2 adapter for instructions see the documentation that came with your IBM host Before you load the host configuration onto the OSA 2 adapter you need to know the channel path ID CHPID for the ATM module the unit addresses for the ATM module and the XCA node name The name should be different for the token ring and Ethernet emulations if you are configuring both e Configure the ATM switch for instructions see the documentation that came with your switch e Configure your routers with ATM LLC2 DLSw and SRB optional The current implementation for OSA 2 for SNA subarea supports only a LAN emulation service for ATM either Ethernet or token ring LANE Any station on the network participating in the LAN contains the LAN emulation client LEC The OSA 2 ATM feature is a LEC for the 9672 S 390 server 1 20 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Data Link Switching Overview The OSA 2 ATM can provide up to two ATM LAN emulation clients token ring or Ethernet for its dual physical port attachment Each logical port must be configured to support a specific mode TCP IP an
124. Services Adding Single Switch DLSw Services romai aga E AT 4 2 BLSW SAP TIDE iiaia E R eae 4 4 Adding a DLSW SAF Table ENUY saririk inaani ian iaaa ANa 4 6 Editing a DLEW SAF Table BMY ssriiriierocaspinna anaa aes 4 7 Adding Duat Switeh DLSWw SOVICE S musiehaisniarii iraid NENNE SARA 4 8 DLSW Slot TADIS cuanna ET Drini deems ere eae 4 12 Adding a DLSw Slot IP Table Entry E EE T 4 15 Editing a DLSw Slot IP Table EMEY sss sndsvrataiuionsd armodieremsiccaunsdedmen tanned 4 16 DLSw Peer IP Table a rere sobs ictus eeu rae ence 4 17 Gori NAN PG aorar ANA 4 17 Sy Me E E E E A E E T 4 18 PAGE POSTS coire i 4 19 Simplifying the Pear IP TABS scscissanisavannusiviannennlapcnesalaermlnaniie aeduiens 4 19 Multicast IP Entries RFC 2166 Pere maces a eee n 4 21 Adding a DLSw Peer IP Table Entry E E E E T E 4 22 Editing a DLSw Peer IP Table Entry asiiiicuiiiresninssiaiaisaisiidayii eepedinain 4 23 Configuring DLSw Local Devices for SDLC MIN P R PEE 4 25 Eduga ea DE a S ee nae 4 29 Configuring Predefined MACs and Names c cccccceeeeceeeseeceeeeeeeaeseeneeeseaeeeeaaeeeaes 4 33 Dynamically Learned Remote Systeme cccceecceeeeeneececeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeesaeeteaaeeseaes 4 33 Setting the NetBIOS and MAC Cache Age Timers eseese 4 34 Statically Defined Remote Systems c ccecccceeeceeceeneeeseeeeeeeneeeeaes ee ws 4 35 Adding a DLSw Default NetBIOS Peer IP Table Entry E T 4 36 Editing a DL
125. Site Manager Parameters Backup Max Up Time Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table 0 0 to 999999 s Specifies the maximum time in seconds that the backup peer can remain connected to the local DLSw peer When the maximum time is reached the software terminates the TCP connection if there are no active TCP sessions between the routers The software overrides the Backup Max Up Time parameter setting only if there is an active non idle TCP connection with data transferring between the routers Type a value in the range 0 to 999999 Specify 0 to disable the Backup Max Up Time parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 13 Backup Hold Down Time sec Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table 120 0 to 2147483647 s Specifies the time to wait in seconds after the primary peer is declared unreachable before the local router initiates a TCP connection to the backup peer The holddown time ensures that the primary peer has enough time to respond to a TCP connection request before the local router initiates a TCP connection to the backup peer Type a value in the range 0 to 2147483647 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 14 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 49 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Backup Start Time hhmm Configuration Ma
126. Sw Default NetBIOS Peer IP Table Entry cecceeceseeeesees 4 37 Adding a DLSw Default MAC Peer IP Table Entry errr ere eei 4 38 viii 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Editing a DLSw Default MAC Peer IP Table Entry scce 4 39 Conigurino DLS we PACKAGING siisciuesiiadaonissvicsanwish capyaysrnedalntinn AENA ANTEA 4 41 Configuring the DLSw APPN Boundary Function ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeneeeeeaes 4 43 Disabling and Reenabling the Boundary Function ceecceceeesseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeees 4 46 Configuring DLSw for IP Multicasting PEA TE PE rr 4 47 Adding IP Multicasting to a Router Running DLSw cccceeceeeeeseeeteeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 47 Adding IP Multicasting to Slots in a DLSw Router Running IP Multicast 4 50 Editing IP Multicasting Parameters secu P P S ARAT P ok Gomigurma DLW Backup Peete icc cscsiuieiieatevsclencspiiizssas EENAA 4 52 Configuring Peers for an RFC Multicast Peer ccccecceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 52 Configuring Peers for an RFC 1434 1795 or V2 0 Peer ccccccccseeceeesesteeeeeeeaes 4 54 Enabling Rev P for DSW osuacantessuseresnsin agains rman a A E Configuring DLSw RSVP Peers Niania T toati ore itunes eee 4 58 Editing DLSw RSVP Global Parameters ccesssctesseseecdsccevtaiencotaeatbascestacteenddeatiscnevantes 4 58 Specifying SRB or TB for DLSw over ATM Token Ring LANE cceceeeeeeeeeeeeees 4
127. Sw PP Parameters Defaults window Instructions for configuring the default priority queues are covered under the following topics Topic Page Enabling the Default Queues for Configured and Unconfigured Peers 4 6 Customizing the Default Queue Configuration 4 65 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services Enabling the Default Queues for Configured and Unconfigured Peers To enable the default queues for configured and unconfigured peers complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Protocols menu opens choose Protocols 2 Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose Prot Prioritization Outbound 4 Choose Global The Global DLSw PP Parameters Defaults window opens 5 Set the Protocol Priority PP parameter to Enabled Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 87 If you want to use the default priority queue structure for all unconfigured peers set the PP for Unconfigured Peers parameter to Enabled Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 87 6 Click on OK The message Enable All DLSw Peers is displayed 7 Click on OK The Configuration Manager window opens Customizing the Default Queue Configuration When you enable DLSw protocol prioritization every DLSw peer uses default values that control how priority queues work You can change these values
128. The option is any standard 12 digit hexadecimal most significant bit MSB token ring MAC address dest_mac is the token ring or Ethernet host that the local device will reach using SDLC services The option is any 12 digit hexadecimal address MSB token ring MAC address name is the name of the adjacent link station The values are any 8 byte ASCII name For example to configure a local device with a link station address of 0x01 a source MAC address of 123456789012 a destination MAC address of 222222222222 and the name boston enter disw serial 5 2 local device 0x01 source mac 123456789012 destination mac 222222222222 pu name boston local device 2 4 26 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Using Site Manager Customizing DLSw Services To configure a local device complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose the connector on which you want to configure an SDLC device The Edit Connector window opens Click on Edit Circuit The Circuit Definition window opens From the Circuit Definition menu bar choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens 5 Choose Local Devices The DLSw Local Device Configuration window opens Click on Add The Local Device Configuration window opens Edit the following parameters DLSw Mode Link Station Address hex PU Na
129. To specify the original destination MAC address and the address to which you want it translated navigate to the global dlsw prompt for example box disw and enter mac translation original mac addr lt orig_addr gt translated mac addr lt trans_addr gt orig addr is the originally configured MAC address of the destination station trans_adadr is the translated MAC address of the destination station For example to translate the original MAC address from 111111111111 to 222222222222 enter dlsw mac translation original mac addr 111111111111 translated mac addr 222222222222 mac translation 111111111111 To change the translated destination MAC address navigate to the mac address translation prompt for example box dlsw mac translation lt orig_addr gt and enter translated mac addr lt trans_addr gt For example to change the translated destination MAC address from 222222222222 to 444444444444 enter mac translation 111111111111 translated mac addr 444444444444 mac translation 111111111111 Note You cannot change the original destination MAC address 4 60 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Using Site Manager Customizing DLSw Services To enable MAC address translation complete the following steps Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens 2 Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens 3 Ch
130. Would you like to configure Adjacent Link Stations on this port appears 10 Click on Cancel The Configuration Manager window opens Disabling and Reenabling the Boundary Function By default the DLSw APPN boundary is enabled on the router You can use the following Site Manager procedure to disable and reenable it 4 46 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services Site Manager Path You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens 2 Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose Boundary Function The Boundary Function menu opens 4 Choose Global The Edit VCCT Global Parameters window opens Set the Enable parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 72 Click on OK The Configuration Manager window opens Configuring DLSw for IP Multicasting To configure DLSw for IP multicasting you must Configure DLSw to run in RFC 2166 multicast mode To do this in Site Manager set the DLSw RFC Version parameter from the DLSw Basic Global Parameters window to RFC 2166 To do this using the BCC enter rfc type rfc2166 at the dlsw global prompt Enable IGMP See Configuring IP Multicasting and Multimedia Services for instructions Supply an IP multicast group address and assign the address to a DLSw slot Adding IP Multicasting to a Router Running DLSw
131. a TCP connection request before the local router initiates a TCP connection to the backup peer Accept the default 120 or click on the Values button and specify a different value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 15 1 8 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 77 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Backup Start Time hhmm Configuration Manager gt DLSw gt Multicast IP Table gt Multicast IP Table 1 0 to 2400 Specifies the start time when a configured backup peer is available During this time period the local router can establish a TCP connection with this backup peer if the primary peer is unreachable Type the start time in hhmm format where hh is hours and mm is minutes using the 24 hour clock For example typing 0820 specifies 8 20 a m and 2400 specifies 12 00 midnight Type 0 to disable the Backup Start Time parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 15 1 9 Backup End Time hhmm Configuration Manager gt DLSw gt Multicast IP Table gt Multicast IP Table 2400 1 to 2400 Specifies the end time when a configured backup peer is available During this time period the local router can establish a TCP connection with this backup peer if the primary peer is unreachable Type the end time in hhmm format where hh is hours and mm is minutes using the 24 hour clock For example typin
132. able entry navigate to the dlsw global prompt for example box dlsw and enter netbios peer lt netbios_name gt peer ip addr lt peer_ip_addr gt netbios_name is the name of the remote NetBIOS client server or application that you want to reach via DLSw services peer_ip_adadr is the IP address of the DLSw peer that can reach the remote NetBIOS client server or application named in the same DLSw default NetBIOS peer IP table entry The value is any 32 bit IP address in the form network host using dotted decimal notation For example to specify a NetBIOS peer with the name boston and an IP address of 3 3 3 3 enter disw netbios peer boston peer ip addr 3 3 3 3 netbios peer boston Using Site Manager To add a new DLSw default NetBIOS peer IP table entry complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Protocols menu opens choose Protocols 2 Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose Default NetBIOS The DLSw NetBIOS Peer Configuration window opens 4 Click on Add The DLSw NetBIOS Configuration window opens continued 4 36 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 5 Set the following parameters NetBIOS Name NetBIOS Peer IP Address Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 63
133. address to which you want the original MAC address translated MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 16 1 3 Global DLSw Protocol Priority Parameters The Global DLSw PP Parameters Defaults window Figure A 29 contains parameters that let you enable default queues for configured and unconfigured peers and customize the values that control how priority queues work Global DLSw PP Parameters Defaults Protocol Priority PP FISABLED PP for Unconfigured Peers ENABLED Max Queue Buffers for Unconfig Peers 50 Max Queue Size for Unconfig Peers 16000 Default Bandwidths Q0 Q1 Q9 60 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Figure A 29 Global DLSw PP Parameters Defaults Window A 86 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Protocol Priority PP Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Prot Prioritization Outbound gt Global Disabled Enabled Disabled Toggles protocol prioritization on and off for configured DLSw peers The default Disabled disables all default priority queues Accepting the default is useful if you want to temporarily disable protocol prioritization for configured peers Set to Enabled to turn protocol prioritization on Accept the default Disabled if you want to temporarily disable all protocol prioritization activity 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 17 Note Once you enable a peer specific priority queue using th
134. ailable the local router can establish a TCP connection with it if the primary peer is unreachable The values are 0 to 2400 in hhmm format the default is 1 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 23 Configuring DLSw Services backup type lt bu_type gt bu_type is the DLSw backup peer type Values are multicast v20udp v20unknonw v20tcp tecp1795 The default is v20unknown peer interoperability lt peer_interoperability gt peer_interoperability allows interoperability with other vendor s routers The values are enabled and disabled the default is enabled peer ip addr lt peer_ip_addr gt peer_ip_adar is the IP address of the DLSw peer transport type lt transport_type gt transport_type is the transport capability of the remote peer tcp udp or unknown The local router attempts to use this configured transport option when establishing a TCP connection with the remote peer This parameter is only valid when rfc type is set to V2 0 The values are tcp udp or unknown the default is unknown For example to change peer interoperability from enabled to disabled complete the following steps 1 Check the current value of the peer interoperability parameter peer 5 5 5 5 peer interoperability peer interoperability enabled 2 Change the value to disabled peer 5 5 5 5 peer interoperability disabled peer 5 5 5 5 4 24 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services Using Site Manager To edit configured peers complet
135. al Ring ID hex DLSw Peer IP Address dual switch networks only Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 4 Note For a description of SR Internal LAN ID see Configuring Bridging Services 9 Click on OK The DLSw Basic Interface window opens 10 Set SR Interface Ring ID and DLSw Slot IP Address Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 8 Note For a description of SR Interface Ring ID see Configuring Bridging Services 11 Click on OK The Configuration Manager window opens 3 16 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Starting DLSw Services Starting DLSw over Frame Relay BNN Because the BNN format does not carry the destination MAC address incoming LAN frames must be forwarded to a specific permanent virtual circuit PVC for delivery to the host The router uses a frame relay mapping table to get the destination MAC address The table has these fields e DLCI which represents a frame relay PVC e Remote MAC which is the destination MAC address e Local MAC which is a source MAC address There is one frame relay mapping table for each physical frame relay interface Each entry must have a value specified for the Local MAC Remote MAC or both Incoming LLC2 packets such as LAN packets are checked against the entries in this table If a match occurs the router forwards the frame only to the DLCI specified If no entry is found then the informati
136. al TCP connection lt 4 gt Figure C 12 Capex positi CapexMsg with version 2 tcp conn 1 vendor specific 000045 ve response p See data flows Capex positive response CapexMsg with version 1 tcp conn 2 vendor specific 000045 Host DLS0052A Exchange Between Two Routers Running DLSw Version 2 0 TCP Peer Configured as Remote Router in Fallback Mode on One Router Figure C 13 shows a primary SDLC to secondary SDLC PU 2 0 data flow between two Nortel Networks routers using DLSw single switch connected via SNA frame relay RFC 1490 Figure C 14 shows a primary SDLC to LLC2 PU 2 0 data flow between Nortel Networks routers using DLSw single switch connected via SNA Frame Relay RFC 1490 308622 14 00 Rev 00 C 41 Configuring DLSw Services Router Router End Host Single switch DLSw Single switch DLSw station SDLC to Frame relay SDLC to Frame relay gt a Frame relay E network Z SDLC SDLC CO_ISAP_REG D CO_ISAP_REG e E9 red y CO_ISAP_REG CO_ISAP_REG rsp rsp CONNECT_SEND req See note 2 CONNECT_SEND rsp MS ata E Se Be dee arcs ee eh es ee E ee er _ See note 1 Set_Mode_Send req SNRM gt Set_Mode_Send oe rsp CANUREACH lt TEST Cmd CANUREACH lt RRR lt C IC
137. al circuit and add a DLSw interface to the circuit complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose Boundary Function The Boundary Function window opens 4 Click on Add VCCT The message Do you want to create a new Virtual Circuit or use an existing one appears 5 Click on Yes to create a new virtual circuit The VCCT Slot Configuration window and add a DLSw interface to the virtual opens circuit 6 Specify a slot for the virtual circuit you are creating Click on Help or see the Slot Number parameter description on page A 69 The slot you choose for the virtual circuit must be the same slot on which DLSw and APPN are running 7 Click on OK The Configuration Manager window opens 4 44 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services Step 3 Obtaining the Virtual Circuit Number Site Manager assigns a circuit number to each virtual circuit you create When you add an APPN interface to the virtual circuit you are using to support the boundary function you must specify the circuit number assigned to the VCCT To obtain this information complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols
138. ameters DLSw RFC Version DLSw Virtual Ring ID hex DLSw Peer IP Address for dual switch networks only Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 4 5 Click on OK The DLSw Basic Interface window opens 6 Set DLSw Slot IP Address Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 8 Click on OK The Configuration Manager window opens 308622 14 00 Rev 00 3 5 Configuring DLSw Services Starting DLSw over Token Ring The following sections describe how to start DLSw over token ring using the BCC or Site Manager Using the BCC To configure DLSw on a token ring interface you first configure SRB and DLSw global attributes Then you configure LLC2 SRB and DLSw on that interface For example to configure DLSw on an token ring interface with default settings navigate in configuration mode to the top level box prompt 1 Configure DLSw global attributes box disw dlsw 2 Specify the slot for the IP interface and the IP address to use for TCP connections based on this slot For example to configure slot 3 with an IP address of 1 1 1 3 enter dlsw slot ip 3 ip addr 1 1 1 3 slot ip 3 3 Return to the box level prompt slot ip 3 box box 4 Configure SRB global attributes box srb internal lan id 0x10 bridge id 0x20 srb 5 Return to the box level prompt srb box 6 Specify the token ring interface on which you want
139. ameters Default MAC Peer IP Address A 68 MAC Address A 66 MAC Peer IP Address A 67 Default NetBIOS Peer IP Address parameter A 65 default NetBIOS peer IP entries adding A 62 default NetBIOS peer IP parameters NetBIOS Name A 63 NetBIOS Peer IP Address A 64 A 65 Index 1 dequeuing algorithms weighted dequeuing 2 17 DLSw prioritization 2 17 Destination Host MAC hex parameter A 36 Destination Host SAP hex parameter A 37 Device Activation Seq parameter A 42 DLSw bridging services transparent bridge 2 6 communication over TCP IP 1 16 media support for 1 3 networking overview 1 2 peers defining in a TCP IP network 4 17 protocol prioritization 1 44 SDLC media support 1 3 single and dual switch services 1 11 DLSw IP Virtual Ring parameter A 14 DLSw Mode parameter A 28 A 30 DLSw NetBIOS Support parameter A 6 DLSw packaging 2 13 DLSw Peer IP Address add only parameter A 6 DLSw Reject Unconfigured Peers A 5 DLSw RFC Version parameter A 4 A 18 DLSw RSVP Support parameter A 6 DLSw Slot IP Address parameter A 8 DLSw Virtual Ring ID hex parameter A 5 dual switch services 1 11 E Enable parameter A 27 A 72 Enable XID PassThru parameter A 41 Ethernet 802 3 multiple DLSw peers serving a LAN 2 10 F flow control configuration parameters for 4 7 A 40 LLC 2 12 TCP 2 13 frame relay support 1 28 Index 2 G global parameters Ban2 Termination Suppo
140. anges 7 Click on Done The Configuration Manager window opens Configuring Peers for an RFC 1434 1795 or V2 0 Peer The following sections describe how to configure peers for an RFC 1434 1795 or V2 0 peer using the BCC or Site Manager 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services Using the BCC To configure DLSw backup peers for an RFC 1434 1795 or DLSw V2 0 peer navigate to the peer prompt for example box dlsw peer 5 5 5 5 and enter backup peer yes To edit the backup peer enter one or more of the following parameters backup end time lt bu_end_time gt bu_end_time is the end time when a configured backup peer is available The values are 1 to 2400 The default is 1 backup hold down lt bu_hold_time gt bu_hold_time is the time to wait in seconds after the primary peer is declared unreachable before the local router initiates a TCP connection to the backup peer The values are 0 to 21474836478 The default is 120 backup ip addr lt bu_ip_addr gt bu_ip_adadr is the IP address of a backup DLSw peer backup max uptime lt bu_max_uptime gt bu_max_uptime is the maximum time in seconds that the backup peer can remain connected to the local DLSw peer The values are 0 to 999999 The default is 0 backup peer lt bu_peer gt bu_peer indicates whether to configure a backup peer for the primary peer The values are yes and no The default is no A backup peer can only be configured for
141. arameter A 46 A 91 queue depth 2 20 priority queues See queues priority product support xxiv protocol prioritization advantages of 2 14 clipped packets 2 20 Default Queue Bandwidths parameter A 89 definition of 2 14 description of 2 14 DLSw dequeuing 2 17 Max Queue Buffers for Unconfig Peers parameter A 88 Max Queue Buffers parameter A 46 A 91 Max Queue Size for Unconfig Peers parameter A 88 PP for Unconfigured Peers parameter A 87 Protocol Priority parameter A 87 queue depth 2 20 tuning 2 20 protocol prioritization overview 1 44 Protocol Priority parameter A 46 A 87 A 91 PU 1 0 1 18 PU 2 0 1 18 PU 2 1 1 18 PU 4 1 18 PU 5 1 20 PU Name parameter A 31 PU Type parameter A 31 publications hard copy xxiv related xxiii Q Queue Bandwidth Percent parameter A 93 queue depth DLSw protocol prioritization 2 20 Queue Number parameter A 92 queues overview 2 14 308622 14 00 Rev 00 queues priority configuring default 4 65 enqueuing 2 16 R Reject Unconfigured Peers parameter A 17 remote NetBIOS SNA systems 4 33 RFC 1490 frame relay standard 1 29 RFC 1795 support 1 3 RFC 2166 multicast support 1 6 RSVP global parameters DLSw RSVP Support A 6 Incoming Bandwidth A 80 Incoming Burst Size A 81 Non Peak End Time A 83 Non Peak Incoming Bandwidth A 82 Non Peak Outgoing Bandwidth A 81 Non Peak Start Time A 82 Non Peak Starting Days A 83 Outgoing Bandwidth A 80 Outgoing Burst
142. arameter to a nonzero value when using the circuitless IP address For more information about the circuitless IP interface refer to Configuring IP ARP RIP and OSPF Services Note If you configure RFC 2166 you must specify the IP interface address that is multicast capable for the DLSw slot table Figure 4 4 shows a sample network with three routers running DLSw Although many options exist for the slot table this network uses the following values e Router A the central site router has three slots running DLSw as follows Slot 1 represented by the circuitless IP address This provides the highest availability for token ring devices Slot 3 represented by the IP address of the directly attached frame relay interface Slot 4 represented by an IP address of a token ring interface on slot 1 It is acceptable to use any other IP address existing on this router to represent this slot e Router B a remote site connected to the central site using frame relay is a single slot router running single switch DLSw The IP address of the frame relay interface represents this slot in the slot table e Router C a regional site connected to the central site using multiple links is a single slot router running dual switch DLSw The circuitless IP address represents this slot in the slot table 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 13 Configuring DLSw Services Router A 192 32 10 1 LAN gateway Mainframe oo Ww EY LEY
143. arameters window opens 5 Set the Ban2 Termination Support parameter to Enabled Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 25 6 Click on OK The Configuration Manager window opens 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 63 Configuring DLSw Services Configuring DLSw Prioritization DLSw prioritization is an outbound filtering mechanism that allows you to assign preference to specific types of traffic supported by DLSw DLSw prioritization does not affect traffic as it enters the router but affects the sequence in which data leaves the router slot In addition to using the menu selections shown in the following sections you can access the DLSw Protocol Prioritization windows directly from the DLSw Peer Configuration window To access the Global DLSw PP Parameters window click on PP Global in the DLSw Peer Configuration window To access the Peer Queue Configuration window click on PP Queues in the DLSw Peer Configuration window To access the DLS Priority Outbound window click on PP Filters in the DLSw Peer Configuration window Note This section assumes that DLSw is already configured on an interface and that the peer table is complete For information about configuring a circuit with DLSw and setting the slot peer and SAP parameters refer to earlier sections Configuring Default Priority Queues You configure the default behavior of DLSw protocol prioritization using the Global DL
144. arranty does not apply if the media has been damaged as a result of accident misuse or abuse The Licensee assumes all responsibility for selection of the Software to achieve Licensee s intended results and for the installation use and results obtained from the Software Nortel Networks does not warrant a that the functions contained in the software will meet the Licensee s requirements b that the Software will operate in the hardware or software combinations that the Licensee may select c that the operation of the Software will be uninterrupted or error free or d that all defects in the operation of the Software will be corrected Nortel Networks is not obligated to remedy any Software defect that cannot be reproduced with the latest Software release These warranties do not apply to the Software if it has been i altered except by Nortel Networks or in accordance with its instructions ii used in conjunction with another vendor s product resulting in the defect or iii damaged by improper environment abuse misuse accident or negligence THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES AND LIMITATIONS ARE EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES AND ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Licensee is responsible 308622 14 00 Rev 00 iii for the security of its own data and information and for maintaining adequate procedures apart from the Software to reconstru
145. as described in Chapter 3 Starting DLSw Services For complete information about IP multicasting and instructions for configuring IGMP DVMRP and MOSPF on the router see Configuring IP Multicasting and Multimedia Services 308622 14 00 Rev 00 1 7 Configuring DLSw Services Assigning an IP Multicast Group Address to a Slot In an IP multicasting network a sender or source of IP multicast datagrams addresses each datagram to a group of receivers An IP multicast group address is a Class D address the high order bits are set to 1110 from 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 Note Do not use addresses 224 0 0 0 through 224 0 0 255 these addresses are used for control purposes only On a router configured for DLSw multicasting each DLSw slot is associated with an IP multicast group address The router in Figure 1 1 for example is running DLSw on slot 3 The network administrator has assigned the group address 224 0 10 0 to slot 3 TestP CANUREACH_ex Slot Protocol 2 IP Multicast DVMRP IP network IP multicast group address 224 0 10 0 DLS0039A Figure 1 1 Addressing a Message to an IP Multicast Group When DLSw receives a TestP message the following steps occur 1 DLSw converts the TestP message into a CANUREACH_ex message 2 DLSw uses the IP multicast group address associated with slot 3 224 0 10 0 as the destination address of the CANUREACH message 3 DLSw passes the message to IP running on
146. ate with the FEP The connection between routers A and B can be any medium that supports IP Intermediate routers that are located between routers A and B must transport IP packets using IP routing DLSw is not required by the intermediate node 4 8 308622 14 00 Rev 00 AS 400 wi Ea Figure 4 3 Customizing DLSw Services Frame relay network CT Front end processor 3174 Router B Router A DLS0030A DLSw Dual Switch Network Example To configure dual switch DLSw services on the router you define Using the BCC DLSw global and interface parameters DLSw advanced global and advanced interface parameters Site Manager only DLSw slot table entries DLSw peer IP table entries To configure dual switch DLSw services navigate to the dlsw global prompt for example box disw and complete the following steps 1 Specify a slot for the IP interface and an IP address to use for TCP connections based on this slot disw slot ip lt s ot gt ip addr lt ip_addr gt slot ip 4 slot is the slot number for the IP interface address you reserved for that slot jjp_adar is an IP address for a DLSw peer slot in the router TCP uses this IP address for connections associated with that slot 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 9 Configuring DLSw Services Return to the d
147. ault Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Destination SAP hex Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Local Devices gt Add Ox4 0x01 to OxFE Identifies with the Destination MAC the token ring or Ethernet host that the local device will reach using SDLC services This parameter must be entered into the SAP table of the source and destination routers The default 04 is included in the default SAP table Consult your host system manager for the host SAP address Enter the Ox prefix followed by a one digit or two digit hexadecimal address 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 12 1 9 MAXOUT Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Local Devices gt Add 7 1 to 127 Controls the maximum number of consecutive frames that an SDLC link station can send without acknowledgment Enter a value from 1 to 127 For SDLC modulo 128 set this parameter to 127 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 7 5 1 10 MAXDATA Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Local Devices gt Add 2057 265 521 1033 20571 4105 Specifies the maximum frame size that SDLC supports This value includes the transmission header TH request header RH and request unit RU Enter a maximum frame size equal to or larger than the large
148. between end points devices Nortel Networks routers with DLSw enabled execute the following sequence of events e Upon receiving a TEST POLL or similar frame from an attached end station the receiving slot performs the following Converts the TEST POLL frame into an SSP CANUREACH command Searches the appropriate cache to determine if the remote location is known If the remote location is already in the cache the CANUREACH is forwarded only to this remote location If the remote location is not in the cache DLSw forwards the CANUREACH to all remote routers specified in the DLSw peer IP table if this table exists Forwards the packet to all other slots defined in the DLSw slot table e Upon receiving a CANUREACH frame a DLSw slot Forwards the frame to all other slots defined in this router s DLSw slot table Converts the CANUREACH frame back to a TEST POLL frame Forwards the TEST POLL frame to all interfaces on this slot which have DLSw enabled 308622 14 00 Rev 00 C 7 Configuring DLSw Services e If the destination device resides on an attached LAN then this device responds by broadcasting a TEST RESPONSE message Upon receiving this response the remote router Caches the MAC address for SNA or name for NetBIOS in the appropriate table on the router Converts the TEST RESPONSE packet into a DLSw ICANREACH frame Forwards the ICANREACH to the originating data link swi
149. ble entry To edit the parameter complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose Default MAC Click on the default MAC peer that you want to edit The DLSw MAC Peer Configuration window opens Edit the Default MAC Peer IP Address parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 68 6 Click on Apply 7 Click on Done The Configuration Manager window opens 4 40 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services Configuring DLSw Packaging Packaging allows multiple DLSw frames consisting of user data and DLSw s SSP header to be placed into a single TCP IP frame Packaging enhances router performance and is important for networks with many LAN WAN segments Using the BCC To configure DLSw packaging navigate to the dlsw global prompt for example box disw and enter package max size lt package_max_size gt package threshold lt package_threshold gt package timeout lt package_timeout gt package_max_size is the maximum amount of information in bytes that can reside in one package when sending multiple DLSw frames in a single TCP frame for transmission over a WAN The values are 0 to 2147483647 The default is 1532 package_threshold is the percentage of the DLSw TCP windo
150. ble parameter which allows you to enable or disable a selected virtual circuit Enable Figure A 23 VCCT Circuits Window A 72 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Enable Path Configuration Manager gt DLSw gt Boundary Function gt Interfaces Default Enable Options Enable Disable Function Allows you to enable or disable a selected virtual circuit on the router Instructions Accept the default Enable or select Disable MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 24 2 1 2 Adding DLSw Multicast Parameters The DLSw Multicast Configuration window Figure A 24 contains parameters that allow you to add IP multicasting to a specified slot Cancel 8 4 Values Help Multicast IP Address Slot Figure A 24 Add DLSw Multicast Configuration Window 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 73 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Multicast IP Address Path Configuration Manager gt DLSw gt Multicast IP Table gt Multicast IP Table gt Add Default 224 0 10 0 Options Any valid IP address specified in dotted decimal notation The valid range is 224 0 1 0 through 239 255 255 255 Function Specifies the multicast IP address of this entry Instructions Enter the appropriate IP address MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 15 1 3 Parameter Slot Path Configuration Manager gt DLSw gt Multicast IP Table gt Multicast IP Table gt Add Default Depends on the number of slots in the router Fo
151. cal router together with the router returning the UDP response establish a TCP IP session Using UDP explorer frames allows the sending router to explore the network before opening a TCP session enabling routers to support a larger network TCP IP sessions between routers establish themselves across the network when a router locates a destination MAC address When established a TCP IP session remains active between the routers until there are no remaining SNA NetBIOS sessions or until a TCP connection is idle over a configured time period If the local router cannot find the destination MAC address no UDP response the local router establishes TCP sessions with all entries in the peer table using either RFC 1795 or RFC 1434 protocol standards if the destination MAC is an unknown peer type You can configure DLSw to use UDP explorer frames to establish TCP IP sessions with DLSw peers by setting the Transport Type parameter described in Appendix A Site Manager Parameters 308622 14 00 Rev 00 1 5 Configuring DLSw Services TCP UDP and Unknown Peer Types With DLSw Version 2 unicast you can configure DLSw peers as type TCP UDP or unknown If the peer type is unknown the local router sends UDP explorer frames to establish a connection If the local router does not receive a UDP response after a number of attempts it tries to fall back to earlier DLSw RFCs to establish the connection If the peer type is TCP a TC
152. cause the router cannot clip DLSw traffic without breaking the DLSw session DLSw protocol prioritization includes an internal congestion control feature to e Temporarily save overflow packets in memory until the appropriate priority queue can handle them e Notify DLSw to stop and start the flow of packets There must be sufficient memory available for congestion control to prevent clipping The less the congestion the better the queue performance Queue Depth Queue depth is the configurable number of packets that each DLSw priority queue can hold The default value is 50 packets regardless of packet size When you set the queue depth you assign buffers that hold the packets in the DLSw queues Using Site Manager parameters you configure the maximum queue buffers and the percentage of bandwidth for each queue To determine whether there are enough buffers for the DLSw traffic flow on your network examine the following protocol prioritization statistics that the router keeps for each DLSw priority queue e DLSw HiWater Packets Mark The greatest number of packets that have been in each queue e DLSw Congestion Control Count The number of packets that the router has discarded from each queue The router discards packets from full priority queues Generally if a queue s HiWater Packets Mark is close to or equal to its queue depth and its Congestion Control Count is high you have not assigned enough buffers to that queue
153. ccceeeeceeeeeeeeteeteseeeeseneeeeeeeeees A 28 Local Device Configuration Parameters aa ee T PS aun A 42 308622 14 00 Rev 00 ix Adding DLSw Peer IP Table Entry Parameters ccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeteeseeeees AAG DLSw Peer IP Table Entry Parameters separa odred T ees T nonet A 45 DLSW Peer RSVP Paramelelg aissius aa i a a i A 51 Adding DLSw Slot IP Table Entry Parameters ccccccceseeeeseeeeeeeaeseeeeeeseaeeeeaeeeees A 57 DLSw Slot IP Table Entry Parameter E tree errs epee PET A 59 Adding DLSw SAP Table Entry Parameters secsisisiriiisonisnremeniiisiiiinis A 60 DLSW SAP Table Entry Parameter iusvesceccusisssanusscetcarvadustncaneduisnactuuskesdoindsesbermancebeapernus A 61 Adding DLSw Default NetBIOS Peer IP Table Entry Parameters ccceeeeeeees A 62 DLSw Default NetBIOS Peer IP Table Entry Parameter cccccsseeceeeeeeseeeeeenees A 64 Adding DLSw MAC Peer IP Table Entry Parameters cc cee korna EN A 65 Default MAC Peer IP Table Entry Parameter cccccccccssseeeceeesneeeeeessteeeeeeesteeeeenees A 67 OCTO FINOT asisite aiaa iaaa aa aaa aE DEAS EAAS A 69 VCCT Circuit Configuration Parameter PET porniti disian aa pana E A 70 Enabling OCT Global Paramo tet sirosti riea an aati A 71 Enabling VOGT Interlace Paramete osssroeisorininiinanoino niii A 72 Adding DLS Multicast ParaimetetS issiria iae A 73 DLSw Multicast and
154. ce TackWait setting to avoid timeouts The router is sending RNRs The DLS interface Mismatch of SDLC link station interface MAXOUT parameter Improper cabling Edit the MAXOUT parameter setting Install correct cable s See configured for SDLC does Verifying the WAN Cabling not come up on page C 30 An IBM AS 400 cannot Using SAP 0 for SSAP on Configure SAP 0 in the connect to another AS 400 test frames DLSw SAP configuration continued 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Table C 5 Troubleshooting DLSw Networks Common DLSw Problems continued Problem Possible Cause Action Solution File transfers with large packets are slow DLSw uses more CPU than SRB The TCP window size is too small causing RNRs at the source The TCP window size is too large causing latency problems IP WAN frames are fragmented TCP is transmitting too many frames Edit DLSw packaging parameters use protocol prioritization and prioritize SNA traffic over other protocols TCP flow control is limiting performance increase the TCP Window Size parameter setting Critical data is being buffered by TCP decrease the TCP Window Size parameter setting and check performance Set the Virtual Ring MTU parameter to less than the WAN maximum transfer unit Decrease the TCP Window Size parameter setting and check performance The response time is slower than normal
155. ciated with a communication subsystem on a remote device The maximum number of unacknowledged LLC2 frames that the local end station DLSw switch accepts for forwarding to the remote end station 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Monitoring DLSw Using the BCC show Commands show dlisw slots The show disw slots command shows the list of slots that are running DLSw and general information about those slots This command does not use command filters or arguments The output includes the following information Slot Number of the slot on the router running DLSw Slot IP Address IP address of the slot Current Memory KB Current amount of memory on the slot Current Num Sessions Current number of DLSw sessions running on the slot Highest Num Sessions Highest number of DLSw sessions that can be run on the slot show disw summary The show disw summary command displays general information about DLSw interfaces including status interface circuit information and states This command does not use command filters or arguments The output includes the following information DLSw State The state of global DLSw up or down Total Circuits Total number of circuits on the router running DLSw Circuits List of circuits running DLSw State State of the DLSw service on that interface up down init initializing disabled or absent 308622 14 00 Rev 00 D 13 A address learning capabilities 4 33 4 35 MAC 4 33 peer IP 4 18
156. coming DLSw traffic to use in RSVP reservations for this peer during non peak hours Type a value in the range 1 to 2147483647 or accept the default 0 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 27 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Non Peak Incoming Burst Size Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table gt DLSw RSVP 0 0 to 2147483647 bytes Specifies the burst size amount in bytes for the incoming DLSw traffic to use in RSVP reservations for this peer during non peak hours Type a value in the range 1 to 2147483647 or accept the default 0 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 28 Non Peak Start Time Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table gt DLSw RSVP 0 0 to 2400 Specifies the start time of the non peak hours Type the start time in hhmm format where hh is hours and mm is minutes using the 24 hour clock For example typing 0820 specifies 8 20 a m and 2400 specifies 12 00 midnight The Non Peak Start Time parameter is disabled if the Non Peak Starting Days parameter is set to all Os 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 29 Non Peak End Time Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table gt DLSw RSVP 0 0 to 2400 S
157. ct lost or altered files data or programs 4 Limitation of liability INNO EVENT WILL NORTEL NETWORKS OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY COST OF SUBSTITUTE PROCUREMENT SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM INACCURATE OR LOST DATA OR LOSS OF USE OR PROFITS ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF NORTEL NETWORKS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LIABILITY OF NORTEL NETWORKS RELATING TO THE SOFTWARE OR THIS AGREEMENT EXCEED THE PRICE PAID TO NORTEL NETWORKS FOR THE SOFTWARE LICENSE 5 Government Licensees This provision applies to all Software and documentation acquired directly or indirectly by or on behalf of the United States Government The Software and documentation are commercial products licensed on the open market at market prices and were developed entirely at private expense and without the use of any U S Government funds The license to the U S Government is granted only with restricted rights and use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph c 1 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause of FAR 52 227 19 and the limitations set out in this license for civilian agencies and subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause of DFARS 252 227 7013 for agencies of the Department of Defense or
158. ction Sequence 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Troubleshooting DLSw Networks Reviewing the Network Connection Sequence This section describes the debug event messages that router B see Figure C 2 on page C 12 logs when it connects with router A Each message begins with a number that you can use to reference the network activity shown in Figure C 2 SDLC becomes active on the circuit and DLSw notifies SDLC that it is configured on the circuit SDLC processes the DLSw notification and sends a message indicating successful registration DLSw attempts to contact the host with a CANUREACH frame Router B sends the CANUREACH to router A Router A forwards Test P frame to the host 244 07 12 95 08 46 07 DEBUG SLOT 1 SDLC Event Code 8 sdlc_proto_gate_init 245 07 12 95 08 46 08 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 86 received CO_ISAP registration response from SDLC nwif 3171ad50 246 07 12 95 08 46 08 DEBUG SLOT 1 SDLC Event Code 11 DLC_IF_CONNECT_SEND_MSG 247 07 12 95 08 46 08 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 60 received CONNECT response from SDLC port 3171ad50 ls_ref 3171e230 471 07 12 95 08 48 08 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 18 SSP canureach frame received connection 00000000 The host computer returns a Test F frame informing router A that it is available Router A then sends the ICANREACH frame to router B 478 07 12 95 08 48 08 D
159. cvanpionsdesneddddecastiedauadaeepacdetance 1 10 DLSw Networks a Single Switch and b Dual Switch to Switch 1 12 Nortel Networks Single Switch Router 05 iano EEEE P a 1 14 Nortel Networks Adjacent Single Switch Routers seseeseseeseseesseeee 1 15 DLSw Dual Switch Services for SNA Devices on LANS 0 08 1 17 Routers Connecting IBM 3745 Devices ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeetetaeteeeeeeees 1 19 SRB over ATM Token Ring LANE sarissa 1 21 DLSw Over ATM Ethernet LANE cccccc cides isscuncesserdcueaenneenes 1 21 DLSw Dual Switch over ATM LANE Token Ring Using TCP IP 1 22 Primary SDLC Routers in Single Switch DLSw Networks 0 1 25 Secondary SDLC Routers in a Single Switch and p Dual Switeh DLSw NelwarkS costae sees scitaneni tier ugire assured taal aa 1 26 Combining Primary and Secondary SDLC c ceeceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 1 27 Sample Frame Relay NEAWOIK ciscciticconciakessueneacrinsncniaistanenntecamerdnctaess 1 28 Sample Network Using MAC Address Translation ccccseeeeeeees 1 32 Sample Network Using BAN2 Termination cccccseeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 34 Enterprise APPIN NEUWOIK gessisssyiacscieiacscomevicncennivetareneweaeineiaaieniens 1 35 Boundary Function Virtual GIOUN sousse iniii uninin n 1 36 End to End Connection Using a DLSw APPN Router mda Dy FOU oap E taped adeuds 1 37 End to End Connection Using Two DLSw APPN Routers
160. d The term Capex refers to capabilities exchange 1 40 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Data Link Switching Overview Router A End Version 2 0 Router B station with peer configured Version 2 0 Host RSVP receiver RSVP enabled IP network Z R mw 4 gt Single TCP connection CapexMsg with gt vendor specific lt _________ Capex positive RSVP response CapexMsg with vendor specific RSVP Capex positive response OC RSVP Path messages RSVP Resv a messages DLS0056A Figure 1 22 Initiating DLSw Reservations 308622 14 00 Rev 00 1 41 Configuring DLSw Services Specifying DLSw Traffic You identify DLSw traffic by applying outbound filters to forwarded packets Although traffic prioritization and RSVP bandwidth reservation are different features you can combine them to achieve the amount of DLSw flow you want First you configure RSVP to reserve bandwidth Then if you want to give a larger share of the bandwidth to a certain type of DLSw flow you can use traffic filtering to configure that flow s queue with a larger percentage To exclude a flow by not reserving bandwidth for it configure its prioritization queue with O percent bandwidth Packets of such a flow are only sent when there is no congestion DLSw Backu
161. d or SNA Sample Configurations Using OSA 2 ATM Adapter In Figure 1 9 router A is configured with SRB and LLC from the client side PC and with SRB and ATM token ring LANE from the host side The OSA 2 adapter on the host IBM S 390 is configured with ATM token ring LANE Note If the ATM LANE is token ring you do not need to configure DLSw on the router All data traffic goes over SRB for the configuration in Figure 1 9 Pe Router A ATM switch RoS Token ring SRB LLC DLSw and TETI ATM token ring l LANE configured with ATM Ethernet LANE DLS0058A Figure 1 9 SRB over ATM Token Ring LANE In Figure 1 10 router A is configured with SRB and LLC from the client side PC and with DLSw and ATM Ethernet LANE from the host side The OSA 2 adapter on the host IBM S 390 is configured with ATM Ethernet LANE PG Router A ATM switch Mosi a E mm z SRB LLC DLSw and OSA 2 adapter a configured with ATM Ethernet LANE DLS0059A Figure 1 10 DLSw Over ATM Ethernet LANE 308622 14 00 Rev 00 1 21 Configuring DLSw Services oe E In Figure 1 11 router A is configured with DLSw SRB and LLC on the client side PC and with TCP IP PPP over a synchronous line on the host side Router B is configured with TCP IP PPP over a synchronous line from the client side and with DLSw SRB and ATM token ring LANE from the host side I
162. d with that slot For example to specify slot 3 with an IP address of 1 1 1 7 enter dlsw slot ip 3 ip addr 1 1 1 7 Using Site Manager You can edit only the IP Address for TCP Connection parameter in an existing DLSw slot IP table entry 4 16 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services To edit the IP address associated with a particular slot complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Protocols menu opens choose Protocols 2 Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose Slot IP Table The DLSw Slot Configuration window opens 4 Click on the slot you want to edit Edit the IP Address for TCP Connection parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 60 6 Click on Apply 7 Click on Done The Configuration Manager window opens DLSw Peer IP Table TCP IP sessions exchange information between devices attached to each router Data link switches that connect to the same TCP IP network are called DLSw peers Each DLSw peer is represented by an IP address On Nortel Networks routers each slot that you configure with DLSw services functions as an independent DLSw peer Other vendors may offer RFC 1434 1795 compliant products that support either single or multiple DLSw peers internally For example each IBM 6611 processor in your network serves as a single DLSw peer that you
163. defined on the host as a single 8 digit XID A 34 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters XID Format Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Local Devices gt Add None FIXED VARIABLE 2 0 or 2 1 VARIABLE2 2 1 only Specifies the format of the XID I field This parameter is typically set to FIXED for PU 2 0 devices VARIABLE for PU 1 0 devices and VARIABLE2 for PU 2 1 devices Enter one of the following options e FIXED Fixed format used most for PU 2 0 devices e VARIABLE Variable format for T1 0 T2 0 T2 1 to T4 T5 node exchanges used most for PU 1 0 devices e VARIABLE2 Variable format used most for PU 2 1 devices for T2 1 to T2 1 T4 T5 node exchanges N A Source Virtual MAC hex Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Local Devices gt Add None Any standard MSB token ring MAC address Specifies the source MAC address of an emulated token ring end station for this device This parameter must be defined in the LAN gateway when using an IBM 3174 or compatible gateway Other gateways typically do not define this value Enter the 12 digit hexadecimal source MAC address that you want to assign to the SDLC device The address should be in most significant bit MSB format and it should be uni
164. dependent DLSw Translation Bridge Network Parallel Bridge and DLSw Paths If a valid bridging path already exists between two LANs do not configure a parallel DLSw connection path between the same two LANs Figure 2 7 Parallel data paths allow frames to traverse the LANs twice which in turn may confuse systems on the associated LAN segments If a parallel path is required for migration purposes traffic filters must be used to prevent explorers carried by DLSw from being carried in parallel over the SRB network 308622 14 00 Rev 00 2 9 Configuring DLSw Services Token ring 802 5 Token ring 802 5 LAN segment Frames LAN segment Source routing bridge S c TCP IP network _ Router Router SSE Frames DLSOOISA Figure 2 7 DLSw Services in Parallel with a Source Routing Bridge Multiple DLSw Peers on a LAN You can configure two or more DLSw nodes on the same SRB LAN With this configuration each DLSw peer reaches a different set of remote NetBIOS and SNA systems In this case Do not define a TCP connection between these data link switches e Assign the same virtual ring IDs to each peer Taking these precautions prevents frames sent by one DLSw node from propagating through the other DLSw node on the same SRB LAN Note Do not configure multiple data link switches on an Ethernet 802 3 LAN DLSw over Ether
165. e Ring ID see Configuring Bridging Services Click on OK The Configuration Manager window opens Starting DLSw over SDLC The following sections describe how to configure DLSw over SDLC using the BCC or Site Manager Using the BCC To configure DLSw over SDLC you first configure SDLC and DLSw global attributes Then you configure SDLC DLSw and local devices on a serial interface 3 10 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Starting DLSw Services For example to configure SDLC and DLSw on a serial interface with default settings navigate in configuration mode to the top level box prompt 1 Configure SDLC global attributes box sdlic sdlc Return to the box level prompt sdlc box box Configure DLSw global attributes box disw dlsw Specify a slot for the IP interface and the IP address to use for TCP connections based on this slot For example to configure slot 5 with an IP address of 1 1 1 5 enter dlsw Slot ip 5 ip addr 1 1 1 5 slot ip 5 Return to the box level prompt slot ip 5 box box Specify a serial interface on which you want to configure SDLC DLSw and local devices box serial 5 2 serial 5 2 Configure SDLC on the serial interface serial 5 2 sdlc sdlc serial 5 2 Configure DLSw on the serial interface sdlc serial 5 2 dlsw dlsw serial 5 2 Configure a local device on the serial interface dlsw serial 5 2 local device c1 source mac 40003
166. e DLSw The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose SAP Table The DLSw SAP Configuration window opens 4 Click on Add The DLSw Sap Parameter window opens 5 Set the SAP parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 61 6 Click on OK The DLSw SAP Configuration window opens 7 Click on Done The Configuration Manager window opens 4 6 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services Editing a DLSw SAP Table Entry The following sections describe how to edit a DLSw SAP table entry using the BCC or Site Manager Using the BCC To edit the SAP window size navigate to the sap prompt for example box disw sap 4 and enter credit lt window_size gt window_size is the maximum number of unacknowledged LLC2 frames that the local end station DLSw switch accepts for forwarding to the remote end station The values are 6 to 200 The default is 10 For example the following command changes the sap window size to 100 sap 4 credit 100 Using Site Manager You can edit only the SAP Window flow control parameter associated with an existing DLSw SAP table entry Note After you add an entry to the DLSw SAP table Site Manager disallows any attempt to edit the SAP address associated with that entry To change the address of an existing DLSw SAP you must delete the entry in the DLSw SAP Configuration window and then add a new SAP with the new address For informat
167. e Entry Parameters The DLSw SAP Parameter window Figure A 14 allows you to enter SAP table entries The DLSw SAP table contains a list of the SAP addresses associated with communication subsystems on PCs hosts FEPs cluster controllers and other systems in your network DLSw Sap Parameter Cancel OK Values Help Figure A 14 DLSw SAP Parameter Window A 60 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter SAP Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt SAP Table gt Add Default None Options A valid even SAP address 00 to FE in hexadecimal format Function Specifies the destination SAP address associated with a communication subsystem on a remote device for example a PC or host Instructions Begin the address with Ox and type the SAP address associated with a specific communication subsystem For example the SAP associated with NetBIOS is OxFO MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 4 1 2 DLSw SAP Table Entry Parameter The DLSw SAP Configuration window Figure A 15 allows you to change the SAP window setting for an existing SAP table entry Done Add Delete Apply Values Help rt SAP Window Figure A 15 DLSw SAP Configuration Window 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 61 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID SAP Window Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt S
168. e Peer Queue Configuration window Figure A 30 on page A 90 you must use that window to disable that peer s queues You cannot disable queues that are already active from the Global DLSw PP Parameters Defaults window Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID PP for Unconfigured Peers Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Prot Prioritization Outbound gt Global Disabled Enabled Disabled Toggles protocol prioritization for unconfigured DLSw peers on and off The default Disabled disables all unconfigured priority queues Accepting the default is useful if you want to temporarily disable protocol prioritization for unconfigured peers Set to Enabled to turn protocol prioritization on Accept the default Disabled if you want to temporarily disable all protocol prioritization activity 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 20 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Max Queue Buffers for Unconfig Peers Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Prot Prioritization Outbound gt Global 50 10 to 2147483647 bytes Specifies the maximum number of packets in each default queue Enter a number of packets to increase or decrease the default buffer size of 50 packets 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3
169. e list of configured peers in the DLSw peer IP table Instructions Type the IP address of the remote DLSw peer that can reach the remote SNA system or application identified by the MAC address in the same default MAC peer IP table entry MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 10 1 3 Default MAC Peer IP Table Entry Parameter The DLSw MAC Peer Configuration window Figure A 19 contains a parameter that allows you to change the remote DLSw peer that can reach a target SNA system or application 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 67 Configuring DLSw Services 0x2a33bff1dc2e Delete Apply Values Help jd Default Mac Peer IP Address 98 42 61 6 B Figure A 19 DLSw MAC Peer Configuration Window Parameter Default MAC Peer IP Address Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Default MAC Default None Options Any valid 32 bit IP address in the form network host using dotted decimal notation Function Specifies the IP address of a remote DLSw peer that can reach the SNA system or application identified by the MAC address and currently selected in the DLSw MAC Peer Configuration window The router adds this IP address to the list of configured peers in the DLSw peer IP table Instructions Type the IP address of the remote DLSw peer that can reach the remote SNA system or application identified by the MAC address and currently selected in the DLSw MAC Peer Configuration window MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1
170. e router The address cannot be reused on another slot The IP address specifies where the TCP connection for DLSw terminates Enter the appropriate IP address If a circuitless IP address is configured use that address for this parameter For RFC 2166 the slot IP address must be multicast capable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 3 1 3 A 8 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Atm Bridging Mode Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Basic Interface SRB SRB TB You use this parameter only if you have ATM token ring LANE configured and enabled This parameter allows DLSw to communicate with a C100 device configured in SRB mode Select TB transparent bridging or accept the default SRB source route bridging N A For DLSw running over token ring or frame relay BAN the DLSw Basic Interface Parameters window Figure A 4 contains a source routing parameter that lets you identify the ring number of a source routing circuit SR Interface Ring ID For instructions on configuring this parameter see Configuring Bridging Services SR Interface Ring ID DLSw Slot IP Address Atm Bridging Mode Figure A 4 DLSw Basic Interface Parameters for SRB 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 9 Configuring DLSw Services DLSw Advanced Global Parameters The Edit DLSw Global Parameters window Figure A 5 includes the basic global pa
171. e that no backup connection starts during a specified start and end time Configuring Peers for an RFC Multicast Peer The following sections describe how to configure peers for an RFC multicast peer using the BCC or Site Manager Using the BCC To configure DLSw backup peers for an RFC 2166 multicast peer navigate to the multicast ip prompt box disw multicast ip lt p_addr gt and enter backup peer yes To edit the backup peer enter one or more of the following parameters backup end time lt bu_end_time gt bu_end_time is the end time when a configured backup peer is available The values are 0 to 2400 The default is 2400 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services backup hold time lt bu_hold_time gt bu_hold_time is the time to wait in seconds after the primary peer is declared unreachable before the local router initiates a TCP connection to the backup peer The values are 0 to 2147483647 The default is 120 backup ip addr lt bu_ip_adar gt bu_ip_adadr is the IP address of a backup DLSw peer The value is any 32 bit IP address of the form network host using dotted decimal notation backup max uptime lt bu_max_uptime gt bu_max_uptime is the maximum time in seconds that the backup peer can remain connected to the local DLSw peer The values are 0 to 999999 the default is 0 backup peer lt bu_peer gt bu_peer indicates whether a backup peer is to be configured for the primary peer The
172. e the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Protocols menu opens choose Protocols 2 Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose Peer IP Table The DLSw Peer Configuration window opens 4 Click on the remote peer you want to edit Edit the parameters you want to change Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 46 6 Click on Apply 7 Click on Done The Configuration Manager window opens Configuring DLSw Local Devices for SDLC The DLSw Local Devices parameters let you map SDLC devices to LAN MAC and SAP addresses Using the BCC To configure a local device navigate to the dlsw interface prompt for example box serial 5 2 sdic dilsw and enter local device lt ink_station address gt source mac lt source_mac gt destination mac lt dest_mac gt pu name lt name gt Note To configure local devices you must have SDLC configured on this interface Configuring a local device creates a corresponding link station link_station _address is the address of the link station This value must match the polling address defined in the SDLC attached device The value can be any hexadecimal link station address from 0x01 to OxFE 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 25 Configuring DLSw Services source_mac is the source MAC address of an emulated token ring end station for this device
173. e value to disabled peer 5 5 5 5 peer interoperability disabled peer 5 5 5 5 Using Site Manager To configure DLSw backup peers for an RFC 1434 1795 or DLSw V2 0 peer complete the following steps Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Protocols menu opens choose Protocols 2 Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose Peer IP Table The DLSw Peer Configuration window opens continued 4 56 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this Click on the remote peer you want to edit System responds Edit the following parameters Backup Config Backup IP Address Backup Peer Type Backup Max Up Time sec Backup Hold Down Time sec Backup Start Time hhmm Backup End Time hhmm Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 48 6 Click on Apply 7 Click on Done The Configuration Manager window opens Enabling RSVP for DLSw To enable DLSw RSVP support complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens Choose Basic Global The DLSw Basic Global Parameter window opens Set the DLSw RFC Version parameter to eith
174. e_time is the maximum number of seconds that inactive MAC addresses can exist in the MAC to DLSw mapping cache The values are 0 to 2 147 483 647 seconds The default is 300 Enter 0 to disable MAC caching Using Site Manager To set the NetBIOS Cache Age or MAC Cache Age timers complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens 2 Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose Advanced The Edit DLSw Global Parameters window opens Set the following parameters MAC Cache Age NetBIOS Cache Age Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 17 Click on OK The Configuration Manager window opens 4 34 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services Statically Defined Remote Systems To reduce DLSw broadcasts you can statically define the IP addresses of DLSw peers that can reach remote systems or applications associated with specific NetBIOS names or MAC addresses These addresses augment any information that the router s MAC and NetBIOS caching mechanisms learn dynamically Static entries can exist in two tables e Default NetBIOS peer IP table Contains the list of all remote NetBIOS systems and applications that you can access by DLSw connection services on the local router Each entry contains the NetBIOS name and the
175. ed Figure 1 16 shows a sample network using MAC address translation to redirect traffic to two IBM mainframes via 3745 front end processors In this network frame relay BAN is configured on all router interfaces Router A has the following information configured in its MAC Address Translation table Original Destination MAC Translated Destination MAC Address Configured inthe PC Address PC 1 400010000000 Mainframe 1 4FFFO0000000 PC 2 400020000000 Mainframe 2 4FF200000001 PC 3 400105020000 Mainframe 1 4FFFO0000000 PC 4 400105030000 Mainframe 1 4FFFO0000000 The original and translated destination MAC addresses in the tables tell the routers that traffic from PC1 PC3 and PC4 will be redirected to the host with the MAC address 4FFFO0000000 and that traffic from PC2 will be redirected to the host with the MAC address 4FF200000001 308622 14 00 Rev 00 1 31 Configuring DLSw Services Mainframe 2 Mainframe 1 uo wT li a van a 3745 3745 3745 DLS0061A Sample Network Using MAC Address Translation Figure 1 16 1 32 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Data Link Switching Overview BAN2 Termination BAN2 termination allows you to locally terminate
176. ed lines For high speed lines you may want to increase this value or use the default value The default value is based on both NetBIOS and SNA traffic SNA and NetBIOS can have frame sizes up to 4 KB but the default virtual ring maximum transmission unit MTU limits the frame size on the network to 1500 bytes unless changed Keep the window as small as possible This allows the most consistent response time when packets are not excessively queued in TCP Selection of this parameter depends on the WAN speed and frame size distribution MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 4 Note Changing the value of this parameter effects scaling and the number of peers that the router can handle If you have any questions about what the value should be contact the Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Center 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 13 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID DLSw IP Virtual Ring hex Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Advanced gt Global None Any valid unassigned ring number from 1 to 4095 0x001 to OxFFF in hexadecimal format Specifies a standard ring number that SRB uses to identify traffic that is placed on the SRB LAN by DLSw This ring number is the first entry in the packet s RIF The ring number must be unique within the network However all Nortel Networks routers on the network can use the same value The nu
177. ed on slot address assigned to each DLSw slot DLSw TCP connections No peer configured Add a peer and its IP partially come up Peer is not reachable address to the peer table Check to see if IP routing is enabled and the peer is configured or known to DLSw TCP connections come up but traffic is not passed DLSw slot table configuration does not match DLC interface location Correct the configuration by creating a DLS slot entry for every slot that has a DLC interface TCP has excessive retransmissions TCP window is too large TCP is filling WAN buffers and causing dropped frames Edit the TCP Window Size parameter and specify a smaller value Configure protocol prioritization and allocate adequate queue depth TCP sessions do not come down when the IP path is lost TCP Keepalive Time parameter set to 0 Edit the KeepAlive Time parameter and specify a value in the range 0 to 2147483647 seconds Refer to the KeepAlive Time parameter on page A 21 for more information 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Table C 9 Troubleshooting DLSw Networks SNA Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Action Solution SNA stations cannot connect over DLSw Host is unavailable or IP cannot reach it XID is incorrect Destination MAC address incorrect if LLC media is Ethernet the address needs to be in noncanonical format First experience with new device
178. ed on the given IP address The show disw peers command allows the following command filters and argument peer lt peer ip adar gt Shows the peer information for the specified peer IP address down Shows a list of configured peers whose state is down The output for show disw peers includes the following information IP Address The IP address of a remote DLSw peer State State of the remote DLSw peer Up or Down Peer Type Capability Type of peer RFC 1434 RFC 1795 Unknown V2 0 Unicast RFC 2166 Local Transport Type Transport capability at the remote peer TCP UDP or Unknown Backup Peer The IP address of the backup peer 308622 14 00 Rev 00 D 11 Configuring DLSw Services The output for show disw peers backup includes the following IP Address Up Time Hold Down Time Primary Peer Backup Type show dlisw saps The IP address of a remote DLSw peer The maximum time a backup peer can remain connected to the local DLSw peer The time to wait in seconds after the primary peer is declared unreachable before the local router initiates a TCP connection to the backup peer IP address of the primary peer The type of DLSw backup peer multicast v2O0udp v20unknown v20tcp tcp1795 The show disw saps command shows a list of configured SAPs This command does not use command filters or arguments The output includes the following information SAP Credit The destination SAP address asso
179. efault NetBIOS Peer IP Table Entry Parameter A 64 Adding DLSw MAC Peer IP Table Entry Parameters A 65 Default MAC Peer IP Table Entry Parameter A 67 VCCT Slot Parameter A 69 Enabling VCCT Global Parameter A 71 continued 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 1 Configuring DLSw Services Topic Page Enabling VCCT Interface Parameter A 72 Adding DLSw Multicast Parameters A 73 DLSw Multicast and Backup Peer Parameters A 74 DLSw RSVP Global Parameters A 79 Global DLSw Protocol Priority Parameters A 86 Adding MAC Address Translation Parameters A 84 DLSw MAC Address Translation Table A 85 Peer Queue Configuration Parameters A 90 Adding Queue Parameters A 92 DLS Priority Filters Parameters A 93 Using the Parameter Descriptions Each DLSw parameter description provides information about default settings valid parameter options the parameter function instructions for setting the parameter and the management information base MIB object ID The Technician Interface allows you to modify parameters by issuing set and commit commands with the MIB object ID This process is equivalent to modifying parameters using Site Manager For more information about using the Technician Interface to access the MIB see Using Technician Interface Software Caution The Technician Interface does not verify that the value you enter for a parameter is valid Entering an invalid value can corrupt your c
180. eft most byte indicates the presence of the routing information field RIF This bit is set to 1 if the RIF field is present and to 0 if there is no RIF field Keep this in mind if you use a sniffer to analyze packets for their source MAC address For example a sniffer would decode the locally administered address LAA with the first byte of 40 as 0x400031740001 If the RIF bit is set the hexadecimal value of the packet is 0xC00031740001 B 4 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Criteria for DLSw Prioritization Source Routing Bridge Functional MAC Addresses Functional MAC addresses are destination MAC addresses that always conform to the following rules e Byte 0 0xC0 e Byte 1 0x00 e The first half of byte 2 0x0 to 0x7 Table B 5 lists some common functional MAC addresses Table B 5 Functional MAC Addresses Function Name MAC Address MSB Identifying Bit Ethernet Address Active Monitor 0xC000 0000 0001 Byte 5 bit 7 0x030000000080 Ring Parameter 0xC000 0000 0002 Byte 5 bit 6 0x030000000040 Server Ring Error 0xC000 0000 0008 Byte 5 bit 4 0x030000000010 Monitor Configuration 0xC000 0000 0010 Byte 5 bit 3 0x030000000008 Report Server NetBIOS 0xC000 0000 0080 Byte 5 bit 0 0x030000000001 Bridge 0xC000 0000 0100 Byte 4 bit 7 0x030000008000 LAN Manager 0xC000 0000 2000 Byte 4 bit 2 0x030000000400 User Defined 0xC000 0008 0000 to Byte 3 bits 0 4 0x030000100000 to 0xC000 4000 0000 Byte 2 bits 1
181. elp Disable ENABLE DLSw Mode PRIMARY PU Name boston PU Type T2 0 IDBLOCK 3 hex digits 00 IDNUM 5 hex digits Figure A 8 DLS Local Device Configuration Window Parameter Disable Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Local Devices Default Enable Options Enable Disable Function Enables or disables the DLSw local device Instructions Set to Disable if you want to temporarily disable the local device rather than delete it Set to Enable if you want to reinitialize the local device MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 12 1 2 For the rest of the parameter descriptions see the preceding section 9 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 43 Configuring DLSw Services Adding DLSw Peer IP Table Entry Parameters The DLSw Peer Configuration window Figure A 9 contains parameters that let you add remote peers to the DLSw peer IP table The DLSw peer IP table contains the list of all configured remote peers known to the local router Cancel is 4 Values Help Figure A 9 Add DLSw Peer Configuration Window Parameter Peer IP Address Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table gt Add Default None Options Any valid 32 bit IP unicast address in the form network host using dotted decimal notation The valid ranges are 0 0 0 0 through 223 255 255 255 and 240 0 0 0 through 255 255 255 255 Function Specifies the IP address of a remote DLSw peer Addin
182. emote peer Since keepalive packets are sent only on idle lines increasing the keepalive interval may decrease the cost of an idle network In busy networks the keepalive interval is not necessary Frequent traffic for TCP transmission performs the same function as a keepalive setting Enter a value appropriate for the network in the range 0 to 2147483647 seconds We recommend that you set this parameter to the same value on the peer router to maintain synchronization The default is 60 seconds Type the number of seconds that you want for the keepalive time interval or type 0 to disable the keepalive feature 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 16 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 21 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID KeepAlive Retry Timer sec Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Advanced gt Global 60 0 to 600 s The KeepAlive Retry Timer parameter specifies the maximum time in seconds between successive retransmissions of keepalive packets If an acknowledgment is not received by the local peer router within the TCP keepalive retry timeout the local peer router retransmits the keepalive packet The router continues to retransmit keepalive packets at every TCP keepalive retry timeout until it receives an acknowledgment from the remote peer or until TCP reaches the keepali
183. ends this message in an IP unicast datagram Router A receives the ICANREACH_ex unicast message on slot 2 and forwards it to DLSw slot 3 10 Router A sends a TestF message to end station 1 DLSw Single Switch and Dual Switch Services Nortel Networks routers that you configure to support DLSw services can operate in two modes A DLSw single switch configuration involving a single local router with two or more interfaces configured for DLSw A DLSw dual switch to switch configuration involving paired routers each connected to an intervening TCP IP network A Nortel Networks router simultaneously supports both single and dual switch operation Figure 1 4 illustrates DLSw single switch and dual switch to switch networks 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring DLSw Services a DLSw single switch network single router configured with two interfaces Front end processor Cluster controller CT SDLC or QLLC Bay Networks router y Ethernet Frontend b DLSw dual switch to switch network processor dual routers configured with single interfaces to TCP IP oO Cluster controller TCP IP network Bay Networks router Bay Networks router DLSO001A Figure 1 4 DLSw Networks a Single Switch and b Dual Switch to Switch 1 12 308622 14 00 Rev 00
184. er Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Queue Bandwidth Percent Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Prot Prioritization Outbound gt Peer Queue Entries gt Queues gt Add 10 0 to 100 Specifies a bandwidth percentage that you allocate to a protocol priority queue for a configured DLSw peer The bandwidth for queue number zero must be greater than 0 You can assign any percentage between 0 and 99 to subsequent queues as long as the combined bandwidth for all queues totals 100 percent On low speeds running NetBIOS you should allocate 20 percent of the total bandwidth due to end station timing N A DLS Priority Filters Parameters The DLS Priority Outbound Filters window Figure A 32 shows the existing outbound traffic filters for DLSw peers regardless of whether the filters are currently active on the peers Each entry in the filter scroll box lists the filter number filter name and IP address of the affected DLSw peer Filters that apply to all DLSw peers appear with IP address 0 0 0 0 Site Manager numbers the filters for each peer interface chronologically The parameters in this window let you configure and name outbound traffic filters 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 93 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Filter Enable ENABLED Filter Name Figure A 32 DLS P
185. er V2 0 Unicast or RFC2166 Multicast Set the DLSw RSVP Support parameter to Enabled Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 6 The DLSw RSVP Global Parameters window opens Edit the parameters you want to change Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 80 Click on OK The Configuration Manager window opens 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 57 Configuring DLSw Services Configuring DLSw RSVP Peers To configure RSVP parameters for DLSw peers complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Protocols menu opens choose Protocols 2 Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose Peer IP Table The DLSw Peer Configuration window opens 4 Click on DLSw RSVP The Edit DLSw Peer RSVP Parameters window opens 5 Edit the parameters you want to change Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 52 6 Click on OK The Configuration Manager window opens Editing DLSw RSVP Global Parameters To edit DLSw RSVP Global parameters complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Protocols menu opens choose Protocols 2 Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose DLSw RSVP Global The Edit DLSw RSVP Global Parameters window opens
186. er a DLSw port the software first converts the frames to SNA format before broadcasting the frames across all configured DLSw slots If you disable this feature the router will broadcast the frames only over the DLSw slots on which the frames are received Instructions Click on Values and select Enable or Disable MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 26 Note Because a DLSw slot can have multiple ports or interfaces the Multislot Broadcasts parameter setting affects all DLSw ports on the slot on which CANUREACH frames are received Parameter Initial Pacing Window Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Advanced gt Global Default 5 Options 5 to 100 Function Specifies the initial number of received data frames that the local DLSw router permits during an established connection with another DLSw router running RFC 1795 or DLSw Version 2 or RFC 2166 The two DLSw routers advertise their initial pacing value to each other over capabilities exchange messages Instructions Enter a value in the range 5 to 100 Depending on the amount of network traffic MIB Object ID during the session the router may increase or decrease the pacing window size An increase in the window size means that the router is granting permission to receive more data frames from the sending DLSw router A decrease in the window size means that the router is reducing the number of data frames that it will accept from the sending DLSw r
187. er window choose Protocols Choose DLSw The Protocols menu opens The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose Prot Prioritization Outbound Choose PP Traffic Filters The DLS Priority Outbound Filters window opens Click on Template The Filter Template Management window opens For instructions on using this window to create templates see Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization Click on Create to make a new template or choose an existing template and click on Edit The Create DLS Template window or the Edit DLS Template window opens depending on whether you chose Create or Edit Using the Filter Name field name the template Choose a DLSw criterion See Appendix B Criteria for DLSw Prioritization for more information Choose Action 10 Choose Add 11 Choose Queue The Queue Number window opens 12 Set the Queue Number parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 92 DLSw will send traffic that meets this filters criteria and ranges to the queue number you specify continued 4 70 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 13 Click on OK The Filter Template Management window opens 14 Click on Done or to apply the template The DLS Priority Outbound Filters click on Create window opens 15 To apply the tem
188. erie Lego nsspa iA C 2 Using and Decoding the DLSw Log PE Sortan eres eee as ee retai raai ee O8 Sample Log ENIES oreina aE aa aa E eicehasutuaates C 6 Erot COJE cts ashrnstis th cits sats sues on ata bins cae aia arama EEE aduecuntemien andi C 6 Event Code 17 cee PEE eee ere rer renee rere cree errr eerie errr C 6 Evon CONE SE sas ecisias NAAN N a C 6 EO A ai saa eased wince a EE ad An aE C 7 DL on ema NIN ccce chances Savard aaa C 7 BSianiehing DLSW LLG Donne enn i niiendirerisannvedt naV E N S C 8 Reviewing the Network Log sessen E E EEE EE E C 10 Establishing DLSWSDLCG Connie tons sinc catsccscesdscetsnsetaniarssepecilaakicdaasionieaesacasenegisuceans C 11 Reviewing the Network Connection Sequence 2c ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeteeeeeteaaeseeeees C 13 Disconnecting from the Network PA E PEES Semele eee atu 0 14 Bice ele lcet eet sit ats DESNE iynin hta ener ny rer ree teen Prirer rire ererrrr ne rr rire Tre tT etree C 15 Viewing Isolated PPS NS i Seti sate oeciouty tc eeinaun toeeena nS iourteetiasentess autre oats C 15 Common DLSw Problems and Nonproblemng ciccccscccicccincesscceacdsercnsssseetedersiannanncnens C 17 Gommon DLW Probes cc isendasandehiindiannantGarmsn nia NE Common DLSw Nonproblems T amis A reas heels Sete C 20 DLSw TOUR SSHOGHIG TIDES ssscticrctesattinndscacdeneestcradirteneomneideMs a uale C 22 Verifying the WAN CGY cs sets nari Saucivns pests an Gliasin an Owes ne
189. es 308622 14 00 Rev 00 1 39 Configuring DLSw Services Starting RSVP To start an RSVP session you must first establish a TCP connection between the sending and receiving routers The routers then perform a capabilities exchange If both routers have DLSw RSVP enabled the sending router begins sending RSVP Path messages to the remote end These messages allow the receiving router to issue a request to reserve bandwidth The receiving router then supplies the necessary bandwidth parameters to the sender and issues the request to reserve bandwidth Reservations are established when the RSVP reservation request Resv messages sent by the receiver reach the sender During the capability exchange both the receiving and sending routers send bandwidth information and configuration settings to peer routers so that an unconfigured peer can determine whether it is a sender a receiver or both The per peer configuration takes precedence over global configuration If a conflict arises over how much bandwidth to reserve the maximum amount applies If either the sender or the receiver fails to send its reservation information no reservation occurs the TCP connection holds and DLSw continues to deliver data If an error or change occurs in the reservation RSVP notifies both the sender and the receiver Figure 1 22 illustrates the initiation of RSVP for two routers Router A is configured with RSVP router B does not have a peer configure
190. es gt Add Default 30 Options 0 to 3600 s Function Specifies the time interval in seconds after which the router sends a CANUREACH message to the remote DLSw peer to establish a session This parameter setting becomes active when the Canureach Timer and Canureach Retries settings expire Set the Canureach Timer2 and the Canureach Retries2 parameters in configurations where you want to switch to a longer interval if the initial connection does not occur within the Canureach Timer and Canureach Retries settings The slow poll timer would then use the Canureach Timer2 and Canureach Retries2 settings Instructions Enter the number of seconds that you want for the time interval For example enter 1 to transmit a CANUREACH message once per second or enter 3600 to transmit the command once per hour Enter 0 if you do not want to transmit a CANUREACH message MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 12 1 17 Parameter Canureach Retries2 Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Local Devices gt Add Default 0 Options 0 to 4294967295 Function Specifies the number of times a CANUREACH message is sent to the remote DLSw peer to establish a session This parameter setting becomes active when the standard Canureach Retries parameter setting expires Set the Canureach Timer2 and the Canureach Retries2 parameters in configurations where you want to switch to a longer interval if the initial connection does not occur within t
191. ests Type 4294967295 to send an infinite number of connect requests for this connection 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 12 1 14 SDLC Receive Credit Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Local Devices gt Add 10 0 to 200 Specifies the maximum number of frames that the SDLC can send to DLSw This parameter is for flow control Enter the maximum number of frames you want the SDLC to send to DLSw For example enter 1 if you want DLSw to accept one frame from the SDLC before it updates the SDLC credit Enter 0 if you want DLSw to receive an infinite number of frames from the SDLC without updating the SDLC credit 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 12 1 15 A 40 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters SDLC Transmit Credit Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Local Devices gt Add 10 0 to 200 Specifies the maximum number of frames that DLSw can send to the SDLC Enter the maximum number of frames you want DLSw to send to the SDLC For example enter 1 if you want DLSw to send only one frame to the SDLC until it receives a credit update from the SDLC Enter 0 if you want DLSw to send an infinite number of frames to the SDLC without updating the SDLC credit 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 12 1 16 Enable XID PassThru Configuration Manager gt Protoc
192. eters in Appendix A Site Manager Parameters If you are using the BCC set the backup type and transport type parameters Backup Peers A backup peer receives all DLSw related broadcast frames for a given router or network processor if the primary peer router is unavailable or cannot be reached over a TCP connection When you specify the backup IP address DLSw places the entry in the backup peer IP table The backup peer IP table parameters allow you to manage a router that you want to use when the local router cannot connect to a primary DLSw peer Simplifying the Peer IP Table Nortel Networks provides the following mechanisms for reducing the number of required entries in the DLSw peer IP table e Broadcast peers e Unconfigured peers Broadcast Peers It is not necessary to enter more than one peer per remote router into the peer IP table The entry representing the remote router is the broadcast peer for that router Only broadcast peers normally receive broadcast frames from another router However all DLSw peers on a remote Nortel Networks router can both receive and respond to broadcast frames that the broadcast peer in that router forwards internally 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 19 Configuring DLSw Services Unconfigured Peers A Nortel Networks router running DLSw can respond to requests from remote routers to initiate DLSw sessions even if the local router s peer IP table does not contain the remote peer definiti
193. g With weighted dequeuing packets at the front of the protocol prioritization queues enter a dequeue list and receive a weighted score Packets with the lowest score are transmitted first By distributing the selection of packets from all queues weighted dequeuing is more stable than the algorithms used for circuit level WAN protocol prioritization One goal of weighted dequeuing is to send small packets ahead of large packets without violating the bandwidth of each queue or depriving large packets The algorithm accomplishes this by putting smaller packets ahead of larger packets by simultaneously considering how long the larger packets have been in the dequeue list A large packet accumulates credit lowering its weighted score as each smaller packet gets ahead of it and eventually the larger packet moves to the front of the dequeue list The Dequeue List Three factors determine a packet s weighted score e Size of the packet e Percent of bandwidth allocated to the packet s queue e Time spent in the dequeue list The dequeuing algorithm calculates a packet s dequeue weight using the following formula Size of packet Weight __ Time in dequeue list Bandwidth 308622 14 00 Rev 00 2 17 Configuring DLSw Services Weighted Dequeuing Algorithm Weighted dequeuing works as follows 1 2 3s 4 5 6 Each priority queue enters its first oldest entry on a dequeue list The dequeue list
194. g 0820 specifies 8 20 a m and 2400 specifies 12 00 midnight The Backup End Time parameter is disabled if the Backup Start Time is set to 0 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 15 1 10 A 78 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters DLSw RSVP Global Parameters The Edit DLSw RSVP Global Parameters window Figure A 26 contains parameters that let you specify default RSVP values for all peers Outgoing Bandwidth Outgoing Burst Size Incoming Bandwidth Incoming Burst Size Non peak Outgoing Bandwidth Non Peak Outgoing Burst Size Non Peak Incoming Bandwidth Non Peak Incoming Burst Size Non Peak Start Time Non Peak End Time Figure A 26 Edit DLSw RSVP Global Parameters Window 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 79 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Outgoing Bandwidth Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt DLSw RSVP Global 0 0 to 2147483647 b s Specifies the bandwidth amount b s for the outgoing DLSw traffic to use in RSVP reservations for unconfigured peers or peers that will use global parameters Type a value in the range 1 to 2147483647 or accept the default 0 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 38 Outgoing Burst Size Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt
195. g this address to the DLSw peer IP table defines a configured peer to the local router Configured peers receive all DLSw related broadcast frames from the local router Instructions Type the IP address where the configured peer should receive all DLSw related broadcast frames MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 3 A 44 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters DLSw Peer IP Table Entry Parameters The DLSw Peer Configuration window Figure A 10 contains several parameters that let you customize remote peers that you have already configured 1 2 3 4 UNKNOWN Protocol Priority Max Queue Buffers Max Queue Size Transport Type Peer Interoperability Backup Config Done Add Delete PP Queues PP Filters DLSw RSYP Apply Values Help DISABLED 50 16000 UNKNOWN ENABLED NO Figure A 10 DLSw Peer Configuration Window 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 45 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Protocol Priority Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table Disabled Enabled Disabled Toggles protocol prioritization on and off for this peer If you set this parameter to Disabled priority filters will be disabled on this peer Setting th
196. going connections The router continues to support MAC addresses that are not translated MAC address translation is useful if two or more companiecompany A is taken over by company B and company B wants company A to use their IBM mainframe the company A users have to configure their PCs with the new destination mainframe MAC address With MAC address translation the router redirects traffic destined for the original destination MAC address to the new destination MAC address If MAC address translation is enabled when a router receives an LLC frame the router checks whether the destination MAC address in the frame is in the MAC Address Translation table If the address is in the table the router checks whether the address is configured for translation If the address is configured for translation the router replaces the original destination MAC address with the target destination MAC address that it finds in the table The DLSw connection uses the new target destination address throughout the session and all the way to the new destination host When the router receives a session response from the host DLSw replaces the source MAC address with the original one before it transmits the frame to LLC 1 30 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Data Link Switching Overview You can add and delete a translated MAC address Any changes to the MAC Address Translation table affect only new connections The existing connections stay up until they are terminat
197. h DLSw Version 2 and with configured DLSw backup peers This parameter operates with the TCP Inact Method parameter Enter a time in the range 0 to 2147483647 seconds 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 34 TCP Inact Method Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Advanced gt Global Circuits Never Circuits Data Specifies the type of connection that will cause a TCP connection to terminate when the TCP inactivity time expires Inactivity results when there is no active DLSw circuit between the local router and a remote peer or if no data has been transferred between the peers The TCP Inact Method parameter functions with DLSw Version 2 RFC 2166 or configured DLSw backup peers This parameter operates with the TCP Inact Time parameter Click on Values and select Never Circuits or Data e Select Never to keep the TCP connection active when the inactivity time expires e Select Circuits to disable the TCP connection when a session does not exist between the peers when the inactivity timer expires e Select Data to disable the TCP connection if no data has been transferred between the peers when the inactivity timer expires 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 35 A 24 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Objec
198. he Configuration Manager window The Protocols menu opens choose Protocols 2 Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose Prot Prioritization Outbound 4 Choose Peer Queue Entries The Peer Queue Configuration window opens 5 Click on the individual peer address 6 Set the Protocol Priority parameter to Enabled or Disabled Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 91 7 Click on Apply 8 Click on Done The Peer Queue Configuration window opens Customizing Specific DLSw Peer Queues When you create and enable peer specific queues the DLSw peer in question uses default values that dictate how the priority queues work You can change these values according to your network traffic needs 4 68 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services To customize a specific DLSw peer queue complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Protocols menu opens choose Protocols 2 Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose Prot Prioritization Outbound 4 Choose Peer Queue Entries The Peer Queue Configuration window opens 5 Click on the individual peer address Edit the parameters you want to change Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 91 7 Click on Apply 8 Click on Done The Peer Queue Configuration window opens Creating
199. he Software or related technical data or information without first obtaining any required export licenses or other governmental approvals Without limiting the foregoing Licensee on behalf of itself and its subsidiaries and affiliates agrees that it will not without first obtaining all export licenses and approvals required by the U S Government i export re export transfer or divert any such Software or technical data or any direct product thereof to any country to which such exports or re exports are restricted or embargoed under United States export control laws and regulations or to any national or resident of such restricted or embargoed countries or ii provide the Software or related technical data or information to any military end user or for any military end use including the design development or production of any chemical nuclear or biological weapons 9 General If any provision of this Agreement is held to be invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction the remainder of the provisions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect This Agreement will be governed by the laws of the state of California Should you have any questions concerning this Agreement contact Nortel Networks 4401 Great America Parkway PO Box 58185 Santa Clara California 95054 8185 LICENSEE ACKNOWLEDGES THAT LICENSEE HAS READ THIS AGREEMENT UNDERSTANDS IT AND AGREES TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS LICENSE
200. he local end station is DISCONNECTED end to end 21 04 25 95 22 43 09 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 16 State change in ssp_dlhalted conn 30927f70 old state 11 new state 11 Troubleshooting DLSw This section provides general information on troubleshooting DLSw and the basic DLSw component subsystems It covers the following topics e Viewing Isolated Problems e Common DLSw Problems and Nonproblems e DLSw Troubleshooting Tables covering symptoms possible causes and actions specific for the following categories DLSw configurations DLSw interfaces TCP SNA NetBIOS LLC SDLC Viewing Isolated Problems This section assumes that you have isolated a problem to DLSw Troubleshoot DLSw as follows 1 Use the Events Manager or the Technician Interface to filter the log to display messages of all severity levels for DLSw If you use the Technician Interface enter log fftwid eDLS s lt s ot_no gt 308622 14 00 Rev 00 C 15 Configuring DLSw Services For example if you are filtering events from slots 3 and 4 enter log fftwid eDLS s3 s4 Make sure that the DLSw MTU size matches the synchronous line MTU size Unnecessary packet fragmentation can occur when these settings do not match Use the Technician Interface or the Statistics Manager to inspect the global SRB settings such as the internal LAN ID the group LAN ID and the bridge ID If you are using the Technic
201. he standard Canureach Timer and Canureach Retries settings Instructions Type the number of retries that you want Enter 0 if you do not want to transmit CANUREACH messages Type 4294967295 to send an infinite number of CANUREACH messages for this connection MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 12 1 18 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 39 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Link Station Timer Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Local Devices gt Add 30 0 to 3600 s Sets the time interval in seconds after which the router sends a connect request to the local SDLC device to establish a session Enter the number of seconds you want for the time interval For example enter 1 to send a connect request once a second or enter 3600 to send a connect request once an hour Enter 0 if you do not want to send connect requests 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 12 1 13 Link Station Retries Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Local Devices gt Add 10 0 to 4294967295 Specifies the maximum number of times that a connect request is sent to the local SDLC device to establish a session Enter the number of retries you want Enter 0 if you do not want to send connect requ
202. hether DLSw peers in this router should accept or reject TCP sessions with other DLSw peers not defined in the DLSw peer table The values are reject and accept The default is accept mac_age_time is the maximum number of seconds that inactive MAC addresses can exist in the MAC to DLSw mapping cache The values are 0 to 2 147 483 647 seconds The default is 300 Enter 0 to disable MAC caching tcp_inact_time is the period of inactivity to elapse before terminating a TCP connection The values are 0 to 2147483647 seconds The default is 300 4 10 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services For example the following commands specify a virtual ring ID of 0x001 rfc type 1434 virtual ring mtu of 100 maximum number of slot sessions of 1000 tcp window size of 10000 keepalive time of 300 seconds reject unconfigured peers mac cache age of 600 and a tcp inactivity time of 600 seconds dlsw virtual ring 0x001 rfc type rfc1434 virtual ring mtu 100 max slot sessions 1000 tcp window size 10000 wan keepalive time 300 unconfigured peers reject mac age time 600 tcp inactivity time 600 Using Site Manager To configure dual switch DLSw services complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens 2 Choose DLSw 3 Choose Basic Global The DLSw menu opens The DLSw Basic Global Parameter window
203. ian Interface enter get wfBrSr 0 Use the Technician Interface or the Statistics Manager to inspect the global DLSw settings such as the configured TCP window size and the total number of established DLSw sessions If you are using the Technician Interface enter get wfDis 0 Make sure that the virtual ring ID for the IP cloud is unique and is consistent among all sites Use the Technician Interface or the Statistics Manager to inspect the state of all of the DLSw interfaces currently configured and the value of the instance field If you are using the Technician Interface enter get wfDisInterfaceEntry 3 Use the Technician Interface or the Statistics Manager to inspect the state of all of the TCP connections If you are using the Technician Interface enter get wiTcpConnEntry 2 Make sure that all active TCP sessions are in an established state represented by the value 5 If the sessions are in an established state the local and remote DLSw TCP slot peer configuration is probably correct 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Troubleshooting DLSw Networks If the sessions are not in an established state do the following e Make sure all slots configured to run DLSw have a slot IP address assigned e Make sure that the slot IP address corresponds to the DLSw Peers setting at the remote site 7 Use the Technician Interface or the Statistics Manager to inspect the reception messages and connection state changes
204. icasting complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens 2 Choose DLSw 3 Choose Multicast IP Table The DLSw menu opens The Multicast IP Table menu opens 4 Choose Multicast IP Table The DLSw Multicast Configuration window opens 5 Click on Add A second DLSw Multicast Configuration window opens 6 Set the following parameters e Multicast IP Address e Slot Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 74 7 Click on OK The first DLSw Multicast Configuration window reopens 8 Edit the parameters you want Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 75 9 Click on Done The Configuration Manager window opens 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services Editing IP Multicasting Parameters The following sections describe how to edit IP multicasting parameters using the BCC or Site Manager Using the BCC To edit the multicasting parameters navigate to the multicast ip prompt box disw multicast ip lt p_addr gt and enter one or more of the following parameters ip addr lt ip_addr gt ip_addris the multicast IP address for this entry The value is any IP address specified in dotted decimal notation The range is 224 0 1 0 through 239 255 255 255 slot mask lt
205. ices this is a fixed value For example IBM 5394 PU 1 0 or PU 2 1 if the RPQ 8Q0775 patch has been applied to the device IBM 3274 PU 2 0 IBM 5494 PU 2 1 IBM 3745 IBM 3720 and IBM 3725 PU 4 if this station is going to be used for PU 4 to PU 4 communication For other devices the PU type is explicitly defined For example the IBM 3174 can be configured as PU 2 0 or PU 2 1 Choose T1 0 T2 0 T2 1 or T4 N A 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 31 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter IDBLOCK Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Local Devices gt Add Default None Options Any 3 digit hexadecimal value Function Specifies the block number which must match the host s IDBLOCK parameter value that identifies incoming connection requests This parameter is used with the PU Type IDNUM and XID Format parameters to determine the station exchange identification XID value Table A 2 lists the IDBLOCK numbers Instructions Obtain the configured value at the host from VTAM or other host operating system for this device MIB Object ID N A Note The IDBLOCK and IDNUM parameters are not required on PU 1 0 PU 2 1 or PU 4 nodes when both the host and client attachments are SDLC or when the host attachment is a Local Major Node such as 3174 DSPU or ESM 5745 DSPU A 32 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Tab
206. igh speed multiprotocol backbone network e Simplifies the migration to a router based network by incorporating SDLC traffic into the multiprotocol backbone without converting the existing end stations e Locally acknowledges the SDLC protocol at each side of the router based network eliminating polling and acknowledgment traffic from the network backbone e Allows high speed links into the SNA host improving response time Figure 1 14 illustrates primary and secondary SDLC using single and dual switch services SDLC Host secondary m E dP OV Ky oa m Z P H Backbone SS Bay Networks Front end Bay Networks router SDLC processer router E J Primary Z B 3174 SDLC secondary 5394 AS 400 DLS0025A Figure 1 14 Combining Primary and Secondary SDLC Negotiable SDLC Support A Nortel Networks router acting as a negotiable device on an SDLC link exchanges XID3 packets with another link station to negotiate which one will be primary and which secondary Link characteristics and the subarea PU name are also exchanged Negotiable SDLC support is limited to PU 4 communications 308622 14 00 Rev 00 1 27 Configuring DLSw Services Frame Relay Suppor
207. imum time in seconds between successive retransmissions of keepalive packets Number of times TCP attempts to establish or maintain a connection The maximum number of attempts the local router should make when establishing a connection with a remote DLSw peer before reverting to earlier DLSw RFCs The period of time before a peer router with a Transport Type of Unknown reverts to RFC 1795 protocols when a NetBIOS name query from the router goes unacknowledged Whether broadcast messages inbound from the DLC should be sent to all active DLSw slots 308622 14 00 Rev 00 D 5 Configuring DLSw Services show dlsw interfaces The show dlsw interfaces command displays general information about DLSw interfaces including the current operational status and interface type This command allows the following command filters and arguments circuit lt circuit name gt Shows interface information for the specified circuit name only enabled Shows interface information for enabled circuits disabled Shows interface information for disabled circuits The output includes the following information Circuit Name Circuit name assigned to the interface State State of the DLSw service up down init initializing disabled or absent Bridge ID Bridge s bridge ID which identifies the Nortel Networks source routing bridges in the network LAN ID Bridge s internal LAN ID which is unique among all other internal LAN IDs
208. incorrect if LLC media is Ethernet the address needs to be in noncanonical format XID is incorrect SDLC device configured for NRZI Check the configuration to ensure that there is an SDLC connection Check the DLSw local device configuration Verify that the MAC address is correct if the LLC media is Ethernet then flip the address format Obtain correct XID values Check the SDLC device and set the Sync Line Coding parameter Note NRZI is not supported on dual or quad sync interfaces C 28 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Troubleshooting DLSw Networks Table C 12 SDLC Troubleshooting continued Problem Possible Cause Action Solution The SDLC connection is up Idle timeout too short for Increase the SDLC Idle Line and down some configurations Timer parameter wfSdicPortAdminldleTimer SDLC device configured for For a half duplex physical half full duplex line set the RTS Enable parameter to Enable or set wfSyncRtsEnable to 1 fora full duplex data link set the Primary Full Duplex parameter to Falsefull duplex or set the variable wfSdicPortAdminPriFdplx to 2 If a PU device fails on an RTS signalling is disabled Enable RTS on the router s AS 400 multidrop circuit all on the router interface line interface connected to PU devices will fail connected to the AS 400 the AS 400 low speed controller Flag streaming is not Set wfSyncForcelFTF to 4 enabled for the AS 400 applicab
209. ion about how to add a new DLSw SAP see the preceding section Adding a DLSw SAP Table Entry 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 7 Configuring DLSw Services To edit the SAP Window parameter associated with a particular DLSw SAP complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols Choose DLSw The Protocols menu opens The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose SAP Table The DLSw SAP Configuration window opens 4 Click on the SAP address you want to edit Edit the SAP Window parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 62 6 Click on Apply 7 Click on Done Adding Dual Switch DLSw Services The Configuration Manager window opens When configuring DLSw dual switch services DLSw is enabled only on interfaces supporting LAN SDLC QLLC frame relay BAN BNN ATM or APPN Boundary attached devices The links between routers are configured for IP routing DLSw is not configured on these links Figure 4 3 illustrates a DLSw dual switch network In this network Dual switch services are used between routers Any SNA device attached to router A can communicate with the AS 400 or FEP connected to router B Single switch conversion can be used between DLSw interfaces on router A as well as between the DLSw interfaces on router B This allows the AS 400 to communic
210. ion of all Site Manager parameters for DLSw see Appendix A Site Manager Parameters You can configure DLSw over LLC and source route bridging For instructions on configuring LLC see Configuring LLC Services For instructions on configuring source route bridging see Configuring Bridging Services 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 1 Configuring DLSw Services Adding Single Switch DLSw Services AS 400 wi Ea When configuring a DLSw single switch network DLSw is enabled on each relevant interface Using single switch mode allows communication between Front end processor Devices attached to different local interfaces on the same router For example an SDLC attached 3274 control unit can communicate with a local LAN attached SNA server Figure 4 1 A local device and an SNA device directly attached to a frame relay network An SNA device connected to router B Figure 4 1 can communicate with the AS 400 using either BNN or BAN protocols SNA and NetBIOS devices attached to different routers each running DLSw For example a NetBIOS client attached to router A can communicate with the NetBIOS server connected to router B Figure 4 1 The connection can cross multiple routers running DLSw Since DLSw is running on the WAN interface the router operates as single switch DLSw Frame relay network NetBIOS client
211. is done in the DLSw slot table Each entry in the table consists of a DLSw slot number plus the address of the IP interface that you allocate for that slot The router uses this IP address to establish the TCP sessions between peers in a DLSw network Generally the IP address that you select is either the circuitless IP address or the IP address of any interface on this slot However it is acceptable to use the IP address of any interface on any slot Before you can add any entries to the slot table you must add or allocate one IP interface for each DLSw capable slot in the router configuration You need not configure the associated IP and DLSw interfaces on the same slot For configurations that do not have as many physical IP interfaces as DLSw slots add IP addresses to one or more IP capable interfaces If required a single interface can support multiple IP addresses for example in large SDLC configurations because IP cannot be configured on SDLC interfaces For more information on configuring multiple IP addresses see Configuring IP ARP RIP and OSPF Services 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services Note You can use the circuitless IP interface address for one and only one DLSw capable slot Using the circuitless IP interface allows TCP connections for DLSw services on that slot to be less dependent on the availability of specific physical circuits or data links We recommend that you set the Keepalive Time p
212. is parameter to Disabled is useful if you want to temporarily disable protocol priority but leave the outbound filters in place Set to Disabled if you want to temporarily disable all protocol prioritization activity on this peer Set to Enabled if you previously disabled protocol prioritization on this peer and now want to reenable it 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 5 Max Queue Buffers Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table 50 10 to 2147483647 Specifies the maximum number of packets in each of this peer s queues Enter a number of packets to increase or decrease the default buffer size of 50 packets 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 6 Max Queue Size Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table 16000 5000 to 2147483647 Specifies the maximum size of each of this peer s queues Enter a number of bytes to increase or decrease the default queue size of 16000 bytes 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 7 A 46 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Transport Type Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table Unknown TCP UDP Unknown Specifies the transport capabilities at the remote peer TCP Transmission Control Protocol UDP User Datagram Protocol or Unknown The local router a
213. it 5 Edit the Default NetBIOS Peer IP Address parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 65 6 Click on Apply 7 Click on Done The Configuration Manager window opens Adding a DLSw Default MAC Peer IP Table Entry The following sections describe how to add a DLSw default MAC peer IP table entry using the BCC or Site Manager Using the BCC To add a new DLSw default MAC peer IP table entry navigate to the dlsw global prompt for example box dlsw and enter mac peer lt mac_addr gt peer ip addr lt peer_ip_addr gt mac_addr is the MAC address associated with the remote SNA system or application that you want to reach via DLSw services The value is any 48 bit MAC address expressed in hexadecimal notation peer_ip_adadr is the IP address of a remote DLSw peer that can reach the remote SNA system or application identified by the MAC address in the same default MAC peer IP table entry The value is any 32 bit IP address in the form network host using dotted decimal notation 4 38 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services For example to specify a MAC peer with the address 123456789012 and an IP address of 1 2 3 4 enter dlsw mac peer 123456789012 peer ip addr 1 2 3 4 mac peer 123456789012 Using Site Manager To add a new DLSw default MAC peer IP table entry complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds
214. ks as described in Negotiable SDLC Support on page 1 27 When configured as an SDLC primary device the router polls downstream cluster controllers such as the IBM 3174 and the IBM 5394 When configured as a secondary device the router responds to polls from the primary device You can use integrated SDLC in a point to point or multipoint topology Point to point connects one SDLC device to another Multipoint connects several secondary SDLC devices to one primary SDLC device You specify the topology when you configure SDLC on the synchronous circuit For more information on the Nortel Networks SDLC implementation see Configuring SDLC Services 308622 14 00 Rev 00 1 23 Configuring DLSw Services Primary SDLC Support A Nortel Networks router configured as a primary device on an SDLC link can e Control the data link e Issue commands e Initiate error recovery procedures The primary link station addresses and sends command frames to any or all secondary link stations on the network Each frame carries the individual or group address of the station or stations to which the frame is directed A secondary link station receives commands and responds to primary link station polls In both single and dual switch to switch networks you must map the addresses of the SDLC devices to token ring 802 5 addresses To map the addresses you configure the SDLC devices as local devices enabling them to appear to the network as natively
215. l Device Configuration window opens 4 Click on the local device whose parameters you want to change 5 Edit the parameters you want to change Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 30 6 Click on Apply to save your changes 7 Click on Done 4 32 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services Configuring Predefined MACs and Names Nortel Networks routers in your network learn about the locations of remote NetBIOS and SNA systems that are accessible through DLSw services in two ways e Through a dynamic process where DLSw inspects incoming frames to learn the location of remote end stations This is a DLSw default mechanism e Through static definitions where the network administrator defines the location of NetBIOS and SNA systems attached to remote LANs Static definitions are never required but may be used to reduce the amount of broadcast messages traversing the network Dynamically Learned Remote Systems Nortel Networks routers cache dynamically learn the MAC address and NetBIOS name of remote systems Local Nortel Networks routers receive frames that contain information about the DLSw peer IP address of each remote system that uses DLSw services This information is learned from broadcast frames TESTs XIDs and NetBIOS generated by the remote end stations or applications The router stores this information in separate NetBIOS and MAC caches The route
216. l FVD e lagasaantnnievamhlaaysemnlioadeaAbaaeeeeees 2 4 DLSw and SRE om a COUN asui aosi renee tr RUPEE aa SAE AAE erent ts cece tere htt te 2 5 DiS and Bridding GErViCET sirisser toes o or ar ron naaa E ari 2 6 DLSw 0 an tne rae GFU siisii anian S A 2 6 DLSW with Tanskaan BAJE sicrheir aes 2 7 Using DLSw Independently of the Translation Bridge ccccccceseeeeeeeeeesteeeeeees 2 8 Paralel Bridge and DLSw Pate edad enacted rssh dtruatvadoumanays texanduledaraddsansSlucuablaaeuuets 2 9 Multiple DLSw Peers on a LAN naaien ais PT areni T eats T ra 2 10 Mamoy PREDTIM onsa E 2 10 TOP COENS naan a A 2 11 BONA lgie E a E E A E E A E 2 12 LECZ FON CONTO airna E ede RES 2 12 TCP Flow Control rate rete ie RNN R sean penny Stine EA 2 13 DL SW FION COTON pronio ai 2 13 DLON PAKAO rira a Tetra T mnnr tt 2 13 DLSW Fiori zalo M eiia P E E E E E rrr Ts 2 14 Protocol Prontzation Ovar viS W s iminsisimsrsnn id A 2 14 Types of Protocol OTE NN sssrinin 2 15 BLOW Prony CUEUGSG cocssscis cccventts aa destiyduadsatiebacuasanbncueentl dn caiea si aaete meee nee cucvanne 2 15 Default and Peer Specific DLSW Queues eeeeeecceeeeeeeeeseeteseeseaetenesseettaees 2 16 The Enqueuing Process PEE EE E RE E ERE 2 16 CRISTO LIU GUNES orrainn aeaa E Ee oe aias 2 17 The SUING PROBES iis savin totsns dea rns sseranornseindanminndmrnesd Ea AEA 2 17 Tuning DLSw Protocol Prioritization OEE oeit secu miata obsti 2 20 DLSw Pri
217. l end station sends frames that the remote end station has yet to acknowledge When the counter reaches half the value specified in the SAP Window parameter the remote DLSw switch sends a flow control indication back to the local DLSw switch For RFC 1434 the flow control indication is an Enter Busy SSP message DLSw Packaging In DLSw dual switch configurations packaging allows multiple DLSw frames consisting of user data and the DLSw SSP header to be placed into a single TCP IP frame This provides two performance benefits e Reduces the number of TCP IP encapsulation program executions This results in fewer router cycles when processing DLSw information e Reduces the amount of TCP IP overhead per DLSw frame Instead of 52 bytes of overhead per information frame 32 for TCP 20 for IP a single TCP IP package carries multiple frames With DLSw packaging a packet may be delayed for a short period while the router waits to see whether there are any more packets routed to the same destination peer This delay can increase network latency However the performance benefits increase the number of packets that can be delivered across the network increasing response time DLSw packaging is important for networks with many LAN WAN segments and for networks with slow WAN links 308622 14 00 Rev 00 2 13 Configuring DLSw Services For detailed information on configuring DLSw packaging parameters refer to Appendix A Site Manager Pa
218. le A 2 IDBLOCK Numbers for Switched PUs Device IDBLOCK Number NPSI 003 3770 004 3650 3680 005 6100 3790 006 NTO 3767 007 34 00E 3774 011 3x74 017 3276 018 8775 019 S 1 021 38 022 5520 031 5280 032 PC SRJE 03D 36 03E 4680 04D APPC PC 050 AS 400 056 6150 05C OS 2 EE 05D WSP 05E PC 3270 061 RS 6000 071 Subarea FFF 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 33 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID IDNUM Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Local Devices gt Add None Any 5 digit hexadecimal value from 00000 to FFFFF for T1 0 or T2 0 nodes Specifies the ID number which must match the host s IDNUM parameter value that identifies incoming connection requests This parameter is used with the PU Type IDBLOCK and XID Format parameters to determine the station XID value Obtain the configured value at the host from VTAM or other host operating system for this device Type a 5 digit hexadecimal value from 00000 to FFFFF for T1 0 or T2 0 nodes N A Note The IDBLOCK and IDNUM parameters are not required on PU 1 0 PU 2 1 or PU 4 nodes when both the host and client attachments are SDLC or when the host attachment is a Local Major Node such as 3174 DSPU or ESM 5745 DSPU IDBLOCK and IDNUM required for PU 2 0 devices only must match the same values on the host The 3 digit block number and the 5 digit ID number may be
219. le for AN ASN high speed controller ARN System 5000 serial modules and the BN octal sync module If you use flag streaming you do not need to enable RTS 308622 14 00 Rev 00 C 29 Configuring DLSw Services Verifying the WAN Cabling Tables C 13 to C 16 list the specific WAN cables that ensure reliable DLSw connectivity over an SLDC connection Each table includes e Nortel Networks cable part number e Pin description and connector type e Modem or no modem configuration BLN and BCN Synchronous Interface Cables AN ARN ASN and EASF Synchronous Interface Cables Table C 13 Nortel Networks Modem Cable Description No Modem 7215 15 pin to male V 35 Modem 7255 15 pin to male RS 232 Modem 7221 15 pin to male X 21 Modem 7941 15 pin to female RS 232 No modem 7942 15 pin to female V 35 No modem AA0018003 44 pin to male X 21 No modem Table C 14 Nortel Networks Modem Cable Description No Modem 7220 44 pin to male V 35 Modem 7224 44 pin to male X 21 Modem 7826 44 pin to male RS 232 Modem 7943 44 pin to female RS 232 No modem 7944 44 pin to female V 35 No modem AA0018004 15 pin to female X 21 No modem 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Troubleshooting DLSw Networks Table C 15 Octal Sync Interface Cables Nortel Networks Modem Cable Description No Modem 7932 50 pin to male V
220. lete Deleting DLSw from a Router Using the BCC To delete DLSw services from the router navigate to the dlsw prompt and enter delete For example the following command removes DLSw from the router dlsw delete box 3 22 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Using Site Manager To delete DLSw from a router entirely Starting DLSw Services Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens 2 Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose Delete DLS A confirmation window opens 4 Click on Yes The Configuration Manager window opens 308622 14 00 Rev 00 3 23 Customizing DLSw Services Chapter 4 Customizing DLSw Services This chapter includes the following information Topic Page Adding Single Switch DLSw Services 4 2 Adding Dual Switch DLSw Services 4 8 Configuring DLSw Local Devices for SDLC 4 25 Configuring Predefined MACs and Names 4 33 Configuring DLSw Packaging 4 41 Configuring the DLSw APPN Boundary Function 4 43 Configuring DLSw for IP Multicasting 4 47 Configuring DLSw Backup Peers 4 52 Enabling RSVP for DLSw 4 57 Specifying SRB or TB for DLSw over ATM Token Ring LANE 4 59 Configuring MAC Address Translation 4 59 Configuring BAN 2 Termination 4 63 Configuring DLSw Prioritization 4 64 For a descript
221. lete the interface if necessary notify Nortel Networks The DLC interface is down Physical interface not up Check the connections make sure that the physical interface is up The DLSw interface is down the LLC interface is up DLSw interface configured on a different slot than physical interface DLSw interface different than corresponding LLC wfLicInterfaceEntry wfLlIcIn terfaceLlc2Cc Potential LLC problem if not notifying DLSw that it is present Check and correct the configuration to ensure that DLSw is configured on the same slot as the physical interface Correct the configuration DLSw must be configured on the slot where DLC termination occurs Delete the LLC interface contact Nortel Networks Ethernet interfaces drop sessions from token ring interfaces Frames sent to Ethernet are larger than 1500 bytes Set the DLSw Virtual Ring MTU parameter to 1518 or less on any routers with token ring Ethernet sessions establish with difficulty Loops formed by dual router Ethernet connections Two DLSw routers connected to an Ethernet segment must have filters to avoid loops 308622 14 00 Rev 00 C 23 Configuring DLSw Services Table C 8 TCP Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Action Solution DLSw TCP connections do Improper DLS slot table Each slot running DLSw not come up configuration no IP address requires a unique IP configur
222. lowing parameters DLSw RFC Version e DLSw Virtual Ring ID hex DLSw Peer IP Address for dual switch networks only Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 4 11 Click on OK The DLSw Basic Interface window opens 12 Do one of the following e If you selected Unspecified or IEEE8023 for the emulated LAN type set the DLSw Slot IP Address parameter e If you selected IEEE8025 for the emulated LAN type set the DLSw Slot IP Address and ATM Bridging Mode parameters Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 8 13 Click on OK The ATM Service Record Parameter window opens 14 Click on Done The ATM Service Records List window opens 15 Click on Done The Edit ATM Connector window opens 16 Click on Done The Select Connection Type window opens 17 Click on Done The Configuration Manager window opens 308622 14 00 Rev 00 3 21 Configuring DLSw Services Deleting DLSw from an Interface To delete DLSw from an interface navigate to the dlsw interface prompt and enter delete For example to remove DLSw from a token ring interface 1 Navigate to the interface from which you want to remove DLSw box token ring 3 1 token ring 3 1 srb srb token ring 3 1 lle2 llc2 token ring 3 1 dlsw disw token ring 3 1l 2 Enter the delete command dlsw token ring 3 1 de
223. lsw prompt slot ip 4 dlsw Enter the following commands dlsw virtual ring lt ring_id gt rfc type lt rfc_type gt virtual ring mtu lt mtu gt max slot sessions lt max_siot gt tcp window size lt fcp_win_size gt wan keepalive time lt keepalive_time gt unconfigured peers lt unconfig_peers gt mac age time lt mac_age_time gt tcp inactivity time lt tcp_inact_time gt ring_id is the standard ring number that SRB uses to identify traffic that DLSw places on the SRB LAN The values are 0x001 to OXFFF rfc_type is the RFC implementation to run on the router The values are rfc1434 rfe1795 v2Ounicast or rfc2166 The default is rfc 1434 mtu is the MTU size for frames sent from local LAN attached systems to systems on remote LANS The value is any number of bytes equal to or greater than 1 The default is 1500 max_slot is the maximum number of LLC2 sessions that a slot in the router can support for DLSw requirements The values are 1 to 10000 The default is 200 tcp_win_size is the maximum amount of DLSw data that the local and remote TCP entities can send before requiring an acknowledgment or can receive before acknowledging The values are 5000 to 64000 The default is 8000 keepalive_time specifies how often the router sends a signal to the peer router to check that the peer router is working correctly and can receive messages The values are 0 to 2 147 483 647 seconds The default is 60 seconds uncontig_peers specifies w
224. mber must be e Unique among any other ring IDs group LAN IDs or internal LAN IDs assigned in the network e The same as the virtual ring number used by all other DLSw peers on the same TCP IP network Entering a hexadecimal value for this mandatory parameter prepares the router for DLSw services on token ring 802 5 circuits Enter a value even if you are presently configuring DLSw services on Ethernet 802 3 circuits only Nortel Networks recommends the value 0xB 13 if this value is available 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 5 Note The DLSw IP Virtual Ring and Virtual Ring MTU parameters that appear in the Edit DLSw Global Parameters window are primarily for compatibility with SRB networks locally attached to the router However Site Manager requires you to enter a value for the DLSw IP Virtual Ring even if you are configuring DLSw services on non SRB segments locally attached to the same router 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Max Slot Sessions Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Advanced gt Global Default 200 Options 1 to 10000 Function Specifies the maximum number of LLC2 sessions that a given slot in the router can support for DLSw requirements Specifying more sessions per slot has the effect of dedicating more memory and processing resources to DLSw interfaces running on the router Instructions If possible estimate the maximum number of LLC2 sessions that each DLSw
225. me Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 30 Edit the following parameters for the PU type you want to configure e For PU 1 0 set PU Type to T1 0 and set XID Format to Variable 1 For PU 2 0 set PU Type to T2 0 set IDBLOCK and IDNUM and set XID Format to Fixed e For PU 2 1 set PU Type to T2 1 and set XID Format to Variable 2 e For PU 4 set PU Type to T4 Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 31 continued 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 27 Configuring DLSw Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 9 Edit the following parameters for the device Source Virtual MAC hex Source Virtual SAP hex Destination Host MAC hex Destination Host SAP hex Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 35 System responds 10 Click on OK The DLS Local Device Configuration window opens 11 Click on Apply to save your changes 12 Choose one of the following tasks e Choose Link Details to display the SDLC Link Station Configuration window Refer to Configuring SDLC Services for information about the parameters in this window Edit a local device Go to the next section Editing a Local Device e Click on Done The Configuration Manager window opens IDBLOCK and IDNUM are not required when a host attachment and client attachment
226. mulated token ring end station for this device The value is any standard 12 digit hexadecimal MSB token ring MAC address source sap lt source_sap gt source_sap is the source service access point SAP of an emulated token ring or Ethernet end station for this device The values are 0x01 to OxFE The default is 0x04 state lt state gt state indicates whether the DLSw local device is enabled or disabled The values are disable or enable The default is enable 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 31 Configuring DLSw Services tx credit lt ix_credit gt tx_credit is the maximum number of frames that DLSw can send to the SDLC The values are 0 to 200 The default is 10 xid format lt xid_format gt xid_format is the format of the XID I field The values are variable1 fixed or variable2 The default is fixed xid pass thru lt xid_pass_thru gt xid_pass_thru specifies whether XID is to be passed to the SDLC when the host is connected to a token ring LAN or other media supporting switched major nodes and the remote device is SDLC The values are enable and disable The default is disable This parameter is used for PU 2 1 circuits Using Site Manager To edit a local device complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Protocols menu opens choose Protocols 2 Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose Local Devices The DLSw Loca
227. must define on the router In each router you can define a list of peers identifying remote routers with which a DLSw session can be initiated These are called configured peers and are defined in the DLSw peer IP table Configured Peers A configured peer is a remote data link switch represented by an IP address that is predefined in the local router You define a configured peer by specifying its unique IP address in the Site Manager DLSw peer IP table 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 17 Configuring DLSw Services IP addresses in the local router s peer IP table must also appear in the slot table of a remote router A configured peer can receive broadcast frames directly from DLSw peers in a local router The local router issues broadcast frames triggered by client demand for connection services Responses to these broadcasts enable the local router to e Identify DLSw peers that can reach the requested remote NetBIOS or SNA system e Manage open restart and close TCP connections to the DLSw peer that can reach the requested SNA or NetBIOS system Once a router knows that a DLSw peer can reach a specific system the router can address frames directly to that peer and avoid unnecessary broadcast traffic on the TCP IP network You typically define as configured peers e One slot in each DLSw capable remote Nortel Networks router in your TCP IP network to which broadcast traffic must be forwarded e Any other peer in your TC
228. n dotted decimal notation Function Specifies an IP address associated with a specific DLSw peer slot in the router TCP uses this IP address for connections associated with that slot Instructions Type a valid IP address for the slot The IP interface need not reside on the DLSw capable slot Do not enter a value for every active slot in the router enter one IP address associated with one DLSw slot MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 3 1 3 DLSw Slot IP Table Entry Parameter The DLSw Slot Configuration window Figure A 13 contains a parameter that lets you change the IP address associated with a specific DLSw peer Delete Apply Values Help A IP Address for TCP Connection 198 42 62 4 le Figure A 13 DLSw Slot Configuration Window 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 59 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter IP Address for TCP Connection Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Slot IP Table Default None Options Any valid 32 bit IP address in the form network host in dotted decimal notation Function Specifies an IP address associated with a specific DLSw peer slot in the router TCP uses this IP address for connections associated with that slot Instructions Type a valid IP address for each slot Do not enter a value for every active slot in the router enter only a single IP address associated with a single DLSw slot MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 3 1 3 Adding DLSw SAP Tabl
229. nager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table 1 0 to 2400 Specifies the start time when a configured backup peer is available During this time period the local router can establish a TCP connection with this backup peer if the primary peer is unreachable Type the start time in hhmm format where hh is hours and mm is minutes using a 24 hour clock For example typing 0820 specifies 8 20 a m and 2400 specifies 12 00 midnight Type 0 to disable the Backup Start Time parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 15 Backup End Time hhmm Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table 1 1 to 2400 Specifies the end time when a configured backup peer is available During this time period the local router can establish a TCP connection with this backup peer if the primary peer is unreachable Type the end time in hhmm format where hh is hours and mm is minutes using a 24 hour clock For example typing 0820 specifies 8 20 a m and 2400 specifies 12 00 midnight The Backup End Time parameter is disabled if the Backup Start Time is set to 0 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 16 A 50 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters DLSw Peer RSVP Parameters The Edit DLSw Peer RSVP Parameters window Figure A 11 contains parameters that let you specify RSVP values for an individual peer RSVP Mode RSVP Slots Outgoing Bandwidth Outgoing Burst Size Incoming Bandwidth Incoming Burst Size Non Peak Outgoing Band
230. nager window opens 4 22 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services Editing a DLSw Peer IP Table Entry The following sections describe how to edit a DLSw peer IP table entry using the BCC or Site Manager Using the BCC To edit configured peers navigate to the peer prompt for example box disw peer 5 5 5 5 and change one or more of the following parameters backup end time lt bu_end_time gt bu_end_time is the end time when a configured backup peer is available The values are 1 to 2400 the default is 1 backup hold down lt bu_hold_time gt bu_hold_time is the time to wait in seconds after the primary peer is declared unreachable before the local router initiates a TCP connection to the backup peer The values are 0 to 21474836478 the default is 120 backup ip addr lt bu_ip_addr gt bu_ip_adadr is the IP address of a backup DLSw peer backup max uptime lt bu_max_uptime gt bu_max_uptime is the maximum time in seconds that the backup peer can remain connected to the local DLSw peer The values are 0 to 999999 The default is 0 backup peer lt bu_peer bu_peer indicates whether to configure a backup peer for the primary peer The values are yes and no The default is no A backup peer can only be configured for an RFC 1434 or RFC 1795 peer backup start time lt bu_start_time gt bu_start_time is the start time when a configured backup peer is available While the backup peer is av
231. ndor specific 000045 Capex positive response See See data flows DLS0050A Figure C 10 Exchange Between a Router Running DLSw Version 2 0 and One Running RFC 1795 Peer on RFC 1795 Router 308622 14 00 Rev 00 C 39 Configuring DLSw Services Figure C 11 shows a capabilities exchange between two Nortel Networks routers running DLSw Version 2 0 A peer is configured as Unknown and in fallback mode on one of the routers End Router station Version 2 0 Router Host with peer configured Version 2 0 cy ee ae ee CapexMsg with version 1 tcp conn 2 gt vendor specific 7 000045 Capex positive response CapexMsg with version 2 tcp conn 1 vendor specific 000045 TCP CONNECTION ___ gt CLOSED DLSO0S1A Figure C 11 Exchange Between Two Routers Running DLSw Version 2 0 Unknown Peer in Fallback Mode on One Router C 40 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Troubleshooting DLSw Networks Figure C 12 shows a capabilities exchange between two Nortel Networks routers running DLSw Version 2 0 A peer is configured as TCP and Remote router in fallback mode on one of the routers End Router station Version 2 0 Router with peer configured Version 2 0 IP Ea n network E ee we t 4 gt Du
232. net 802 3 LANs does not provide loop prevention Memory Requirements DLSw provides buffering of LLC2 packets in single switch mode and additional buffering of TCP packets in dual switch mode Therefore DLSw can use a significant amount of memory 2 10 308622 14 00 Rev 00 DLSw Implementation Notes To limit the memory consumption Nortel Networks provides several mechanisms including e LLC2 Max Links parameter allowing the network administrator to limit the number of LLC2 stations per interface See Configuring LLC Services e DLSw Max Slot Sessions parameter allowing the network administrator to limit the number of LLC2 stations per slot For instructions on accessing and editing the Max Slot Sessions DLSw global parameter see Appendix A Site Manager Parameters e Using DLSw Version 2 0 or RFC 2166 bidirectional TCP connections can be used reducing the amount of memory used for TCP connections e Using either the Site Manager Statistics Manager or the BCC show commands show disw slots and show Ilc2 interfaces to view the attributes wifDIsSlotHiWaterSessions and wfLlcInterfaceHiWaterLinks These attributes allow you to obtain the highest number of sessions on a slot or an interface that were ever active For more information about DLSw memory usage contact the Nortel Networks Technical Support Center TCP Considerations TCP timers allow you to configure DLSw to periodically give TCP data to transmit if a
233. ng Slow Performance Due to Pacing If you experience slow performance and following the steps in Table C 5 does not help check the host pacing parameters These parameters should be set to 0 for optimum performance over high latency links 308622 14 00 Rev 00 C 21 Configuring DLSw Services DLSw Troubleshooting Tables Tables C 6 to C 12 provide the following troubleshooting information for DLSw e DLSw configuration e DLSw interface TCP e SNA e NetBIOS e LLC e SDLC Table C 6 DLSw Configuration Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Action Solution The log file contains no DLSw SDLC LLC or TCP messages Specific router slot not active for DLSw configuration Image missing components Check the hardware configuration to see if DLSw is configured on the slot Make sure that the router software image contains DLS exe LLC exe NBASE exe and SDLC exe Broadcasts are not seen on the desired LAN segments Peer not configured for destination router Configure at least one peer that must receive broadcasts C 22 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Table C 7 Troubleshooting DLSw Networks DLSw Interface Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Action Solution The DLSw interface state is down Physical interface not up DLC interface not up Check the connections make sure that the physical interface is up Check the DLC configuration and de
234. ng DLSw Services Starting Configuration Tools Before configuring DLSw services refer to the following user guides for instructions on how to start and use the Nortel Networks configuration tool of your choice Configuration Tool User Guide Bay Command Console BCC Using the Bay Command Console BCC Site Manager Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager These guides also describe generically how to create or modify a device configuration DLSw Configuration Hierarchy Figure 3 1 shows the hierarchy of DLSw objects and the relationship between objects The ethernet token ring fddi and serial objects are interfaces on which you can configure DLSw using the BCC 3 2 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Starting DLSw Services box DLS0057A Figure 3 1 DLSw Configuration Hierarchy Starting DLSw Globally To configure DLSw on the router with default settings navigate in configuration mode to the top level box prompt 1 Configure DLSw box dlsw 2 Specify a slot for the IP interface and the IP address to use for TCP connections based on this slot For example to configure slot 4 with an IP address of 1 1 1 4 enter dlsw Slot ip 4 ip addr 1 1 1 4 slot ip 4 308622 14 00 Rev 00 3 3 Configuring DLSw Services 3 Return to the dlsw prompt slot ip 4 dlsw 4 Display DLSw default settings disw info Starting DLSw over Ethernet Using the BCC To configure DLSw on an
235. ng for that subsystem and type s of messages or events that could appear in the log Table C 1 Extended Logging Commands for Subsystems Subsystem How to Enable Items Logged DLS s wiDls 14 0 Oxffffffff commit DLSw protocol and data s wiDls 15 0 0x3 committ link control events leading to connection state changes LLC s wfLIclInterfaceEntry 2 cct Oxff1 commit LLC inbound and outbound packets SDLC s wfSdicPortAdminEntry 36 cct 0x1 commit SDLC messages Enabled by default t DLS LLC and SDLC extended logging set by Technician Interface only With extended logging enabled log messages describing the frame flows and state transitions appear during the critical phases of each connection being established C 2 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Troubleshooting DLSw Networks Table C 2 shows more detailed information about the enabling bits shown in Table C 1 Table C 2 Log Messages Enabling Enable Value in Debug Flag Description BCC Value Bits Hex General Control and SSP Events general 1 and 2 0x00000003 SDLC Events sdlic events 1 3 0x00000004 1795 Peer and Capx 1434 Flow rfc1795 4 0x00000008 Control SDLC Events sdlc events 2 5 0x00000010 V2 0 Peer and Capx Events V2 0 events 6 0x00000020 Backup Peer Events backup peer 7 0x00000040 Test Table Lookup Results test tbl lookup 29 0x10000000 SDLC and XID Information sdlc info 31 0x40000000 SDLC LS Reference and DLS sdic
236. nse agreement that may pertain to or accompany the delivery of this computer software the rights of the United States Government regarding its use reproduction and disclosure are as set forth in the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 Statement of Conditions In the interest of improving internal design operational function and or reliability Nortel Networks NA Inc reserves the right to make changes to the products described in this document without notice Nortel Networks NA Inc does not assume any liability that may occur due to the use or application of the product s or circuit layout s described herein Portions of the code in this software product may be Copyright 1988 Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of such portions are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation advertising materials and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that such portions of the software were developed by the University of California Berkeley The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from such portions of the software without specific prior written permission SUCH PORTIONS OF THE SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
237. ols gt DLSw gt Local Devices gt Add Disable Enable Disable Specifies whether XID is to be passed to the SDLC when the host is connected to a token ring LAN or other media supporting Switched Major Nodes and the remote device is SDLC This parameter is used for PU 2 1 circuits Accept the default Disable or change to Enable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 12 1 19 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 41 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Device Activation Seq Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Local Devices gt Add Default Local Device First Options Local Device First Peer First Function Specifies the sequence of activation for SDLC PU2 0 fixed format primary devices Local Device First specifies that DLS establishes a connection with the SDLC end station first Once the local device responds successfully DLS then starts up the SSP connection to the peer Peer First specifies that DLS starts the SSP connection first and contacts the SDLC end station only after receiving a contact message from the peer Instructions Accept the default Local Device First or change to Peer First MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 12 1 12 Local Device Configuration Parameters The DLS Local Device Configuration window Figure A 8 allows you to edit the parameters for a selected SDLC device A 42 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Done boston 0x01 S51 Add Delete Apply Link Details Values H
238. ols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table gt DLSw RSVP 0 0 to 2147483647 bytes Specifies the burst size amount in bytes for the incoming DLSw traffic to use in RSVP reservations for the backup peer Type a value in the range 1 to 2147483647 or accept the default 0 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 35 Adding DLSw Slot IP Table Entry Parameters The DLSw Slot Configuration window Figure A 12 contains the parameters that let you configure DLSw slot IP table entries The DLSw slot IP table contains a list of all DLSw capable slots in your router Each table entry establishes a slot in the router as a DLSw peer on your TCP IP network 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Slot IP Address 198 42 62 q Figure A 12 Add DLSw Slot Configuration Window Slot Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Slot IP Table gt Add None 1 to 14 Specifies the slot number that you want to associate with the IP interface address that you reserved for that slot Type a slot number from 1 to 14 depending on the e Type of node chassis e Slots that link modules can occupy 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 3 1 2 A 58 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter IP Address Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Slot IP Table gt Add Default None Options Any valid 32 bit IP address in the form network host i
239. on When DLSw establishes a session to a remote slot DLSw dynamically adds the slot to the list of known peers Any remote DLSw peer that the router learns dynamically is an unconfigured peer A router s peer IP table does not list the unconfigured peers DLSw supports unconfigured peers only if you set the Site Manager parameter DLSw Reject Unconfigured Peers or the BCC parameter unconfigured peers to Accept When a local DLSw peer Nortel Networks or otherwise receives a broadcast response from a nonbroadcast peer on a Nortel Networks router the local peer opens a DLSw connection to the unconfigured peer Figure 4 5 shows a sample network of three routers running DLSw This network uses the following peer IP table entries e Router A s peer IP table has a single entry as follows The DLSw single switch communication with router B does not require an entry in the peer IP table The connection to router C uses dual switch DLSw You must create an entry in the peer IP table so that router A can forward DLSw broadcasts to router C Router A s peer IP table contains the circuitless IP address of router C 192 32 200 1 since this value is the only value in router C s slot table e Router B communicates to router A via a single switch connection You do not need a peer IP table for router B e Router C communicates with router A using dual switch mode Router C s peer IP table contains the circuitless IP address of route
240. on is not forwarded out this interface as a BNN packet For more information about the frame relay mapping table see Configuring LLC Services 308622 14 00 Rev 00 3 17 Configuring DLSw Services To enable DLSw over frame relay BNN complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Add Circuit window opens select the synchronous connector on which you are enabling DLSw services 2 Click on OK The WAN Protocols window opens 3 Choose Frame Relay 4 Click on OK The Select Protocols window opens 5 Choose DLSw When you choose DLSw you automatically choose LLC2 6 Click on OK The Frame Relay SNA Connection window opens 7 Click on BNN The DLSw Basic Global Parameters window opens 8 Set the following parameters DLSw RFC Version DLSw Virtual Ring ID hex DLSw Peer IP Address dual switch networks only Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 4 9 Click on OK The DLSw Basic Interface window opens 10 Set DLSw Slot IP Address Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 8 11 Click on OK The LLC2 Frame Relay Mappings window opens 12 Click on Add The LLC2 Frame Relay Mapping Add window opens 13 Set the following parameters DLCI Remote MAC Local MAC Refer to Configuring LLC Services for descriptions of the parameters contin
241. onfiguration A 2 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters You may be required to customize the LLC2 TCP IP SDLC or SRB parameters as well since they support DLSw services on the router If so refer to one of the guides listed in Table A 1 Otherwise you can access parameters of the DLSw support protocols from the Protocols menu of the Configuration Manager window or the Circuit Definition window Table A 1 Customizing the DLSw Support Protocols Protocol Refer to This Nortel Networks Guide TCP Configuring IP Utilities IP Configuring IP ARP RARP RIP and OSPF Services SRB Configuring Bridging Services LLC2 Configuring LLC Services SDLC Configuring SDLC Services Multicast DVMRP Configuring IP Multicasting and Multimedia Services MOSPF Configuring IP Multicasting and Multimedia Services DLSw Basic Global Parameters The DLSw Basic Global Parameters window Figure A 1 contains the parameters that let you Select the RFC version DLSw RFC Version page page A 4 Specify the DLSw ring number DLSw Virtual Ring ID page page A 5 Allow TCP sessions with DLSw peers DLSw Reject Unconfigured Peers page page A 5 Enable NetBIOS support DLSw NetBIOS Support page page A 6 Enable DLSw RSVP support DLSw RSVP support page A 6 Specify the DLSw peer address DLSw Peer IP Address page page A 6 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 3 Configuring DLSw Services Cancel OK Values Help DLS
242. oose Advanced The Advanced menu opens 4 Choose Global The Edit DLSw Global Parameters window opens 5 Set the MAC Address Translation Support parameter to Enabled Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 25 6 Click on OK The Configuration Manager window opens To specify the original destination MAC address and the address to which you want it translated complete the following steps Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens 2 Choose DLSw 3 Choose MAC Address Translation Table The DLSw menu opens The DLSw MAC Address Translation Table window opens 4 Click on Add The DLSw MAC Address Translation window opens continued 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 61 Configuring DLSw Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 5 Edit the following parameters Original Destination MAC Address Translated Destination MAC Address Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 84 System responds Click on OK The DLSw MAC Add Table window opens ress Translation Click on Done The Configuration Manager window opens To change the translated destination MAC address complete the following steps Site Manager Procedure You do this System res
243. orders the packets according to a weighted score TCP requests DLSw packets The router sends the requested number of packets or bytes to TCP from the top of the dequeue list up to the configured queue limit TCP transmits the packets The sequence repeats at step 1 Figure 2 8 illustrates weighted dequeuing 2 18 308622 14 00 Rev 00 TCP requests gt packets from a DLSw peer Are there packets in the dequeue list Forward packets with the lowest weighted score to TCP Was the TCP request satisfied NO Figure 2 8 N DLSw Implementation Notes Wait for DLSw packets Are there packets in any of the DLSw peer s queues Divide the size of each packet by its queue s configured of bandwidth Subtract the packet s time in the queue to produce a weighted score Move the first oldest packet from each queue for this peer to the dequeue list DLS0062A Weighted Dequeuing 308622 14 00 Rev 00 2 19 Configuring DLSw Services Tuning DLSw Protocol Prioritization This section explains how congestion control and queue depth affect DLSw prioritization results for your network Customizing the Default Queue Configuration on page 4 65 and Customizing Specific DLSw Peer Queues on page 4 68 show how to use the Configuration Manager to configure these values DLSw Priority Queues and Congestion Control Be
244. ority Queues and Congestion Control sssssssssssseessseesseessresssessreesrees 2 20 Gwene Reeser ee rere he neg ence rer mnt reerecrer etree itr enre ter centre renee treater 2 20 BackUp FOGIS lt i tnsciecacemnine sdeucanngrcaachnnrsccs sont pdbecanesdacedante padcuenieed sacemnmeccbecamnecaceamindace sommes 2 21 Chapter 3 Starting DLSw Services Starting Configuration Tools boneti isiceie errr E oaeiai Gettieeis seine jabatane aoe Ele Se lars cllsae gli ik 1 iiaiai aa te errr irr errre tetera ererrer rrr retry 3 2 VPM DLSW ORDA screicictstee eau tieni antes siieianiutis aai 3 3 Staring DLSW Over EOE secs ccesssketasccsteccdoncstaccinctenteeitedaaegedaedopnreacaqnndege iamncenaieatedeaade 3 4 staring DLSW Over TOKON FUNG briata a A AA 3 6 Starting DLSw over FDDI oai renka sites eee pobreki ri P E re 308622 14 00 Rev 00 vii Staring Low over SDLG acssiansssels asses penne aire Oe Starting DLSw over Frame Relay T aeeiiaii doraka AE PA AT wal Starting DLSw over Frame Relay BAN isois aS 3 15 Starting DLSw over Frame Relay BNN sssssssessesssssessesssssssssressressrenssrrnssrrssennsens 3 17 Starting DLSw over QLLC PE ere err re reeset TE eat 3 19 Staring Loy over ATM LANE sinsir amada a A AAA Aaa 3 20 Deleting DLSw from a Merat uss casshdaieeeridsadessartsedbudaeducaradaarendoueisestaucisntiaonuusds 3 22 Deleting DLSw rom a MOUIET ssis e annie a 3 22 Chapter 4 Customizing DLSw
245. ot ip 3 ip addr 1 1 1 4 Using Site Manager To add a new DLSw slot IP table entry complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols Choose DLSw The Protocols menu opens The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose Slot IP Table The DLSw Slot Configuration window opens Click on Add A second DLSw Slot Configuration window opens Set the following parameters Slot IP Address Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 58 continued 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 15 Configuring DLSw Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 6 Click on OK System responds opens The first DLSw Slot Configuration window 7 Click on Done opens Editing a DLSw Slot IP Table Entry The Configuration Manager window The following sections describe how to edit a DLSw slot IP table entry using the BCC or Site Manager Using the BCC To change the IP address for a slot navigate to the dlsw global prompt for example box dlsw and enter slot ip lt s ot gt ip addr lt ip_adar gt s ot is the slot number that you want to associate with the IP interface address that you reserved for that slot ijp_adar is an IP address associated with a specific DLSw peer slot in the router TCP uses this IP address for connections associate
246. outer 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 27 A 20 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters NetBIOS Session Alive Filter Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Advanced gt Global Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables the NetBIOS session alive frame transmissions Continuously sending session alive frames can cause lines to remain active unnecessarily possibly increasing the usage cost of the line Click on Values and select Enable or Disable Select Enable to start the NetBIOS session alive filter stopping session alive frame transmissions Select Disable to cancel the filter and continue session alive frame transmissions every 30 seconds 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 29 KeepAlive Time sec Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Advanced gt Global 60 0 to 2147483647 s The TCP KeepAlive Time parameter specifies how often the router sends a signal to the peer router to check that the peer router is working correctly and can receive messages You enable the parameter by specifying a nonzero value When a keepalive packet goes unacknowledged by the remote peer retransmission begins at the local peer router You should tune the keepalive interval based on the total time it takes to send and receive acknowledgment from the r
247. output includes the following information Destination MAC Address The MAC address associated with the SNA system or application that you reach via DLSw services Remote IP Address The IP address of a remote DLSw peer that can reach the remote SNA system or application D 8 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Monitoring DLSw Using the BCC show Commands show disw multicast ip The show disw multicast ip command shows a list of configured multicast IP addresses This command supports the following subcommand option backup Shows a list of configured backup peers The show disw multicast ip backup command allows the following command filter and argument ip addr lt jip addr gt Shows a specific backup peer based on the given IP address The show disw multicast ip command allows the following command filter and argument ip addr lt ip addr gt Shows the multicast IP information for the specified multicast IP address The output for show disw multicast ip includes the following information IP Address The multicast IP address for an entry State State of multicasting active or inactive Backup Peer IP address of a backup DLSw peer Slots The slots to receive and transmit multicast data 308622 14 00 Rev 00 D 9 Configuring DLSw Services The output for show disw multicast ip backup includes the following information IP Address Up Time Hold Down Time Primary Peer Backup Type show disw netbios
248. ow ccccseeeeceeeeteeeeeeeeteeeeeees A 63 DLSw NetBIOS Peer Configuration Window mu gees E A 64 DLSw MAC Configuration WINdoW sscicscccacss cosssscciacctetassccnteresenntenegescncans A 66 DLSw MAC Peer Configuration Window c ccccsceeseeesteeeteeeeeeeeeeeees A 68 VOGT Slot Configuration Window ccccsascsssseceiessneessecsciannsiesetescdolaioreesuaces A 69 VOGT Get Configuration Window eisai ticeietirts hicausaatiendaventa ncaa A 70 Edit VCCT Global Parameters Window cccccceseeeeeteeeesteeeeeeeeees A 71 WOT CURING WINGO sccntcciccesanteticetonredadcasineiesevondueedasctaeencindetencictonees A 72 Add DLSw Multicast Configuration Window cceeeseeeeeteeeeeneeeeees A 73 DLSw Multicast Configuration WINKOW o cccccccssiescciinnesscusniereuinnarronie A 75 Edit DLSw RSVP Global Parameters Window ccccceeeeeeeeeees A 79 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Figure A 27 Figure A 28 Figure A 29 Figure A 30 Figure A 31 Figure A 32 Figure C 1 Figure C 2 Figure C 3 Figure C 4 Figure C 5 Figure C 6 Figure C 7 Figure C 8 Figure C 9 Figure C 10 Figure C 11 Figure C 12 Figure C 13 Figure C 14 DLSw MAC Address Translation Window ccceeseeeeeteeeeeeteeeeeeeees A 84 DLSw MAC Address Translation Table Window ccceseeeseeeeee A 85 Global DLSw PP Parameters Defaults Window cccecseeeeseeeeeees A 86 Peer Queue Configuration Window
249. p Peer Support If a TCP connection to the primary peer cannot be established DLSw establishes a TCP connection to a backup peer if one is configured DLSw first checks to make sure a backup peer IP address is configured and then initiates a new TCP connection to the backup peer The TCP connection to the backup peer remains as long as it is needed or until the maximum connection time has expired in which case the TCP connection breaks DLSw will break a backup peer connection if no established DLSw connections exist or if the DLSw connections are idle that is no data has passed If a TCP connection with the primary peer is established but then the primary peer goes down DLSw attempts to start another SNA session by sending a message to the primary peer If the connection fails DLSw checks whether a backup peer is configured and then initiates a new TCP connection to the backup peer You can configure backup peers for the following DLSw versions RFC 1434 RFC 1795 DLSw Version 2 0 unicast or RFC 2166 multicast If you are using Site Manager you select a version using the DLSw RFC Version parameter from the DLSw Basic Global Parameters window If you are using the BCC you set the rfc type parameter For instructions on setting these parameters see Chapter 3 Starting DLSw Services For instructions on configuring a backup peer for RFC 2166 multicast as well as for the other DLSw versions see Chapter 4 Customizing D
250. pecifies the end time of the non peak hours Type the end time in hhmm format where hh is hours and mm is minutes using the 24 hour clock For example typing 0820 specifies 8 20 a m and 2400 specifies 12 00 midnight The Non Peak End Time parameter is disabled if the Non Peak Starting Days parameter is set to all Os 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 30 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring DLSw Services Note If the Non Peak Start Time value is greater than the Non Peak End Time value the router assumes that the Non Peak End Time value is after midnight For example if you set the start time to 1700 and the end time to 0800 the end time occurs on the following day Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Non Peak Starting Days Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table gt DLSw RSVP None 0000000 SUNDAY MONDAY TUESDAY WEDNESDAY THURSDAY FRIDAY SATURDAY Specifies the days you want RSVP to use the values set for the Non Peak Start and End Time and Non Peak Bandwidth and Burst Size parameters Click on the Values button Select the days you want RSVP to be active For example if you select SUNDAY and MONDAY then the value in the Non Peak Starting Days field appears as 1100000 To disable this parameter and the Non Peak Start and End Time parameters enter all Os 1
251. peer slot may need to support concurrently Enter a number that e Meets session support requirements for DLSw services provided on any slot of the router e Allows a balance between the number of sessions supported for DLSw services on a slot and the amount of resources remaining for other protocols configured on the same slot Use Statistics Manager to view wfDIsSlotHiWaterSessions and wfLIcInterfaceHiWaterLinks allowing you to obtain the highest number of active sessions on a slot or an interface MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 8 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 15 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Virtual Ring MTU Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Advanced gt Global 1500 1 to 16383 bytes Specifies an MTU size for frames sent from local LAN attached systems to systems on remote LANs The smallest MTU size supported among all remote LANs in your configuration determines the maximum value of the Virtual Ring MTU parameter for the local router The Virtual Ring MTU allows network administrators to limit the size of packets traversing the network Based on the value that you specify the router enters the appropriate maximum MTU into any SRB explorer packet that uses DLSw services Type any number of bytes equal to or greater than 1 Note that Ethernet networks support an MTU size of 1500 bytes while token ring networks support
252. plate click on Create The Create Filter window opens 16 In the Create Filter window type a name for the filter in the Filter Name box 17 Click on All DLSw Peers to apply this template to all configured peers or choose an individual peer from the Interfaces scroll box 18 Choose the template that you want to apply from the Templates scroll box 19 Click on OK The DLS Priority Outbound Filters window opens 20 To apply other templates repeat steps 15 to 19 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 71 Appendix A Site Manager Parameters This appendix describes the DLSw service parameters in the order listed in the Site Manager windows The parameters are organized as follows Topic Page DLSw Basic Global Parameters A 3 DLSw Basic Interface Parameters A 8 DLSw Advanced Global Parameters A 10 DLSw Advanced Interface Configuration Parameters A 26 Adding Local Device Configuration Parameters A 28 Local Device Configuration Parameters A 42 Adding DLSw Peer IP Table Entry Parameters A 44 DLSw Peer IP Table Entry Parameters A 45 DLSw Peer RSVP Parameters A 51 Adding DLSw Slot IP Table Entry Parameters A 57 DLSw Slot IP Table Entry Parameter A 59 Adding DLSw SAP Table Entry Parameters A 60 DLSw SAP Table Entry Parameter A 61 Adding DLSw Default NetBIOS Peer IP Table Entry Parameters A 62 DLSw D
253. ponds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose MAC Address Translation Table Click on the original destination MAC address whose translated destination MAC address you want to change The DLSw MAC Add Table window opens ress Translation Edit the Translated Destination MAC Address parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 84 6 Click on Apply 7 Click on Done The Configuration Manager window opens Note You cannot change the original destination MAC address 4 62 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring BAN 2 Termination Customizing DLSw Services The following sections describe how to configure BAN 2 termination using the BCC or Site Manager Using the BCC To enable BAN 2 termination navigate to the global dlsw prompt for example box disw and enter ban2 termination enabled For example to enable BAN 2 termination enter dlsw ban2 termination enabled dlsw Using Site Manager To enable BAN 2 termination complete the following steps You do this Site Manager Procedure System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens 2 Choose DLSw 3 Choose Advanced The DLSw menu opens The Advanced menu opens 4 Choose Global The Edit DLSw Global P
254. port RFC 1795 called DLSw Version 1 an implementation developed by a consortium of vendors supersedes the original DLSw specification RFC 1434 Starting with Version 11 0 Nortel Networks DLSw routers support RFC 1795 and are fully compatible with Nortel Networks routers that support RFC 1434 with Version 10 0 or earlier 308622 14 00 Rev 00 1 3 Configuring DLSw Services Differences Between RFC 1795 and RFC 1434 Based on RFC 1434 RFC 1795 describes new features as well as modifications to the standard including Modified frame format for session setup including a field for the largest frame size Directed broadcast CANUREACH and ICANREACH control frames This feature reduces broadcasting over the network Capabilities exchange allowing routers to exchange resource information about each other Capabilities exchange flows operate in three categories Fixed information such as an organization s software version Customized information where one router transfers the information to another router Negotiation where routers negotiate the use of proprietary functions and only if both routers support the functions under negotiation Rate based pacing a new standard for flow control between routers Flow control allows a DLSw router to inform another router to slow down or stop sending data when the receiving buffer s fill up Rate based flow control uses a windowing mechanism that allows the routers to send mo
255. que in the network even among other source addresses on the router 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 12 1 6 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 35 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Source Virtual SAP hex Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Local Devices gt Add 0x4 0x01 to OxFE Specifies the source service access point SAP of an emulated token ring or Ethernet end station for this device This parameter must be entered into the SAP table of the source and destination routers The default 04 is included in the default SAP table Begin the address with Ox and enter a one digit or two digit hexadecimal source SAP address associated with this device Typical values are multiples of 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 12 1 7 Destination MAC hex Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Local Devices gt Add None Any standard MSB token ring MAC address Identifies with the Destination SAP the token ring or Ethernet host that the local device will reach using SDLC services This parameter must match the MAC address of the LAN gateway using MSB token ring format Consult your host system manager for the host MAC address then enter the 12 digit hexadecimal address 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 12 1 8 A 36 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Def
256. r FID SNA_START 0 4 Network Priority NP SNA_START 7 1 Transmission Priority Field SNA_START 30 2 TPF Destination Subarea Address SNA_START 64 32 Field DSAF Origin Subarea Address Field SNA_START 96 32 OSAF Expedited Flow Indicator EFI SNA_START 135 1 Destination Element Field DEF SNA_START 144 16 Origin Element Field OEF SNA_START 160 16 308622 14 00 Rev 00 B 3 Configuring DLSw Services Specifying MAC Address Ranges When you create a filter that includes a source or destination MAC address criterion you specify the MAC address range in either most significant bit MSB or canonical format Table B 4 lists the address formats to use Table B 4 Format for Specifying Source Routing MAC Addresses Address Type Address Format PPP MSB Nortel Networks Standard Frame Relay Canonical Nortel Networks Proprietary Frame Relay Canonical Token Ring MSB Ethernet Canonical When defining outbound traffic filters you can specify a MAC address in either MSB or canonical format but the default is canonical Source Routing Bridge Source MAC Addresses When specifying source routing MAC addresses set the MSB to one For example on token ring packets the source MAC address to be filtered is 0x40000037450440 Then 1 Add the first bit set MAC address 0x800000000000 2 Enter the filter criteria range as OxC00037450440 Bit O the 0x80 bit of byte 0 the l
257. r A 192 32 100 1 However you can use any IP address in router A s slot table instead of the circuitless IP address 4 20 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services Router A 192 32 10 1 LAN gateway Mainframe NetBios server C NetBIOS client 192 32 20 1 AS 400 Router C Router B 192 32 20 2 192 32 30 2 192 32 30 1 Frame relay 192 32 40 1 Frame relay 192 32 40 2 Circuitless 192 32 200 1 2 Frame relay Circuitless a 192 32 100 1 Front end SDLC LJ processor control unit Router B Router A Router C Peer IP Table Peer IP Table Peer IP Table No Entries 192 32 200 1 192 32 100 1 DLS0023A Figure 4 5 Sample Network with Peer IP Table Definitions When using dual switch mode you do not configure DLSw on the links between the routers You must configure IP on these interfaces When communicating using single switch mode you must configure DLSw on the connecting interfaces Note that either link from router A to router C can transport DLSw traffic Standard IP routing determines the link over which these routers communicate Multicast IP Entries RFC 2166 When you configure a multicast IP ent
258. r a BLN the default is 00000 Options Depends on the number of slots in the router Function Specifies the slots that you want to receive and transmit multicast data Instructions Click on the Values button Select the slots that you want to receive and transmit MIB Object ID multicast data For example if you select slots 2 and 3 in a BLN then the value in the Slot field appears as 01100 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 15 1 4 DLSw Multicast and Backup Peer Parameters The DLSw Multicast Configuration window Figure A 25 contains parameters that allow you to add or remove slots that you want to receive and transmit multicast data and configure DLSw backup peers for an RFC 2166 multicast peer A 74 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters 224 0 10 0 Slot s None Done Add Delete Apply Values Help nd Pj Multicast IP Slots 00000 j Backup Config Backup IP Address Backup Peer Type Backup Max Up Time sec Backup Hold Down Time sec Figure A 25 DLSw Multicast Configuration Window Multicast IP Slots Configuration Manager gt DLSw gt Multicast IP Table gt Multicast IP Table The value or values you selected for the Slot parameter Depends on the number of slots in the router Specifies the slots that you want to receive and transmit multicast data Accept the value you entered at the Slot parameter on the second
259. r aaa iaia aaa naai C 30 PO intel aE T E ETT C 32 Appendix D Monitoring DLSw Using the BCC show Commands show dlsw all Geen ETR PT a T A N ET denials apenas ene D 2 show GOW COnnediOnS sicisssesincixentecnttescsveineeranveinureccvecnubecadsnnueddad deumepieadeciaberdualbecnadentens D 2 no ON TODE arne tere acer n ek mr nt eer ln mere rts reernnt ay earner ere D 3 show dlsw interfaces ss cccievnsscdsneansssasneanesiannennnenes PEE AAE E E E E E D 6 or DTA oo rG a E NtN enue D 7 oe RE a e E E E A A TE T A EEA D 8 show dow MUCAS sscccadcosctescesescundcactotint aa a a a D 9 snow dow WISTS DOS srzinds D 10 show CISW peers sseesrsseseerrreerens EE TA TE E EPEE PA E T D 11 308622 14 00 Rev 00 xi SHB EE SIGE a D 12 show dlsw slots iene re ene eee e EEEE E EAP tess ET E E E E D 13 SHON MSW GUMMAN aromia R E a ae D 13 Index xii 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 Figure 1 4 Figure 1 5 Figure 1 6 Figure 1 7 Figure 1 8 Figure 1 9 Figure 1 10 Figure 1 11 Figure 1 12 Figure 1 13 Figure 1 14 Figure 1 15 Figure 1 16 Figure 1 17 Figure 1 18 Figure 1 19 Figure 1 20 Figure 1 21 Figure 1 22 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figures Addressing a Message to an IP Multicast Group 1 8 Receiving a Message Addressed to a Multicast Group 0cee 1 9 Multicast DLS We cccticiacragiccecaunrtaictenmsiuiasosseee dd
260. r uses the learned IP address to locally specify the DLSw peer that can reach the desired end station The cache is not used for forwarding traffic during the first LLC2 session but will be used in new sessions with that end station You can set a timer value that determines when NetBIOS or MAC cache entries are removed from the router The timer parameters are NetBIOS Cache Age and MAC Cache Age When the cached entry goes unused for the specified cache age time or becomes unreachable to new queries it is removed from the cache and subsequent frames are broadcast to all configured peers The router refreshes a cache entry when DLSw services establish a connection to the NetBIOS or SNA system associated with that entry The router resets the appropriate Cache Age timer to its maximum wait interval 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 33 Configuring DLSw Services Setting the NetBIOS and MAC Cache Age Timers The following sections describe how to set the NetBIOS and MAC Cache Age Timers using the BCC or Site Manager Using the BCC To set the NetBIOS Cache Age or MAC Cache Age timers navigate to the dlsw global prompt for example box dlsw and enter disw netbios age time lt netbios_age_time gt mac age time lt mac_age_time gt netbios_age_time is the maximum number of seconds that inactive NetBIOS names can exist in the NetBIOS to DLSw peer mapping cache The value is any number of seconds greater than 20 The default is 300 mac_ag
261. rameters DLSw Prioritization Nortel Networks routers enable you to prioritize DLSw traffic by configuring priority queues for DLSw peers You apply DLSw prioritization by using outbound filters This section provides guidelines for implementing DLSw TCP level prioritization Protocol Prioritization Overview Outbound traffic filters act on packets that the router sends on a synchronous interface to a WAN Outbound traffic filter actions let you direct traffic into delivery queues of varying precedence Applying a priority queue action to an outbound filter is called protocol prioritization These outbound filters are often called priority filters As a router operates network traffic from a variety of sources converges at an interface Without protocol prioritization the router transmits packets in a first in first out FIFO order Site Manager s protocol prioritization features allow you to instruct the router to use a different transmit order for specified ranges of packets on an individual interface With protocol prioritization the router sorts traffic into queues according to priority filters that you configure For most traffic you configure priority filters on an outbound interface If a queue is full or you have configured an outbound drop filter the router discards clips the traffic For DLSw traffic you can also create priority queues for DLSw peers the router cannot clip DLSw traffic The router holds the sorted
262. rameters that you used when you first configured DLSw on the interface It also contains parameters that let you tune the DLSw network For example you can Specify the TCP window size TCP Window Size page page A 13 Specify the maximum number of LLC2 sessions Max Slot Sessions page page A 15 Broadcast CANUREACH frames Multislot Broadcasts page page A 20 Set the maximum number of fallback attempts SNA Fallback Attempts page page A 23 Terminate a TCP connection after a period of inactivity TCP Inact Time page page A 24 A 10 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters a Cancel OK Values Help Enable ENABLE E TCP Window Size 8000 DLSw IP Virtual Ring hex 0x1 Max Slot Sessions Virtual Ring MTU Mac Cache Age secs NetBios Cache Age secs 300 Reject Unconfigured Peers ACCEPT DLSw RFC Yersion 20 Maximum Package Size Figure A 5 Edit DLSw Global Parameters Window 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 11 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Enable Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Advanced gt Global Enable Enable Disable Globally enables or disables the system software mechanisms that allow you to add DLSw interfaces to the node configuration e Disable Switches every DLSw interface enabled on the router to the disabled inactive state e Enable Reinitializes every DLSw interface
263. re configured identically Both connect to hosts through a DLSw interface on slot 2 Both have an interface to the IP network on slot 3 On router A the network administrator has assigned IP multicast group address 224 0 10 0 to DLSw slot 3 On router B the network administrator has assigned group address 224 0 10 0 to DLSw slot 2 Router B Protocol Slot IP multicast group address 224 0 10 0 Router A ra Slot Protocol Router C 2 IP Multicast End station 1 DVMRP IP network IP multicast group address 224 0 10 0 IP multicast group address 224 0 10 0 1 TestP 2 CANUREACH_ex 3 TestP _ _ _ _ _ _ 6 TestF 5 ICANREACH_ex 4 TestF p S KX Ss a DLS0041A Figure 1 3 Multicast DLSw 1 10 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Data Link Switching Overview When end station 1 generates an SNA TestP message the following steps occur 1 2 ann mM p Router A receives the TestP message on slot 3 Router A multicasts a CANUREACH_ex message on slot 2 using the group address 224 0 10 0 Routers B and C receive the CANUREACH_ex message and forward the message to slot 3 configured with the IP multicast group address Router B sends a TestP message on slot 3 to host 1 Router C sends a TestP message on slot 3 to host 2 Host 1 responds to the TestP message by sending a TestF message Router B receives the TestF message on slot 3 Router B sends an ICANREACH_ex message on slot 2 Router B s
264. re or fewer packets based on the state of the last receive window If the router successfully receives the last transmission it informs the sending router to continue to send more packets Flow control is essential for successful delivery of SNA and NetBIOS data DLSw Version 2 Unicast UDP Support DLSw Version 2 and RFC 2166 are usually interchangeable terms The Nortel Networks implementation of DLSw Version 2 however offers only unicast User Datagram Protocol UDP support while the RFC 2166 implementation provides full multicast support 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Data Link Switching Overview Beginning with BayRS Version 11 02 unicast UDP support allows you to do the following e Use unicast UDP to send the initial session establishment request CanuReach instead of using TCP as in RFC 1434 and RFC 1795 e Configure peer type TCP UDP and Unknown e Configure dual unidirectional or single bidirectional TCP connections The DLSw RFC Version parameter allows you to set up your configuration for DLSw Version 2 A router that you configure for DLSw Version 2 can also communicate with routers running RFC 1434 and RFC 1795 implementations UDP Explorer Frames If a TCP IP session is not active the local router can send UDP explorer frames across the network to locate the destination media access control MAC address When the local router finds the destination MAC address the destination router returns a UDP response The lo
265. riority Outbound Filters Window Filter Enable Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Prot Prioritization Outbound gt PP Traffic Filters None Enable Disable Indicates whether traffic filter is enabled or disabled Select Enable to enable the traffic filter Select Disable to disable the traffic filter N A A 94 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Filter Name Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Prot Prioritization Outbound gt PP Traffic Filters None 1 to 30 alphanumeric characters Indicates the filter to which you want to apply a template for a specific interface Enter the name you want for the filter The name can be 1 to 30 alphanumeric characters inclusive N A 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 95 Appendix B Criteria for DLSw Prioritization This appendix includes both the DLSw predefined criteria that Site Manager s Configuration Manager provides and the supported DLSw reference points for user defined criteria for DLSw prioritization described in Chapter 4 Customizing DLSw Services Topic Page Predefined DLSw Criteria B 2 DLSw Reference Points B 3 Specifying MAC Address Ranges B 4 Specifying Source and Destination SAP Code Ranges B 308622 14 00 Rev 00 B 1 Configuring DLSw Services Predefined DLSw Criteria You configure
266. rks only Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 4 System responds 10 Click on OK The DLSw Basic Interface window opens 11 Set DLSw Slot IP Address Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 8 12 Click on Done The Configuration Manager window opens Starting DLSw over ATM LANE To enable DLSw over ATM LANE complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window select the ATM connector on which you are enabling DLSw services The Add Circuit window opens 2 Click on OK The Select Connection Type window opens 3 Click on ATM The Initial ATM Signaling Config window opens 4 Click on OK The Edit ATM Connector window opens 5 Click on Service Attributes The ATM Service Records List window opens 6 Click on Add The ATM Service Record Parameters window opens continued 3 20 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Starting DLSw Services Site Manager Procedure continued 7 You do this Edit the parameters you want See Appendix A in Configuring ATM and MPLS Services for parameter descriptions System responds 8 Click on OK 9 Choose DLSw When you choose DLSw you automatically choose LLC2 The Select Protocols window opens The DLSw Basic Global Parameters window opens 10 Set the fol
267. router supports connections to PU 4 devices only Click on Values and select Primary Secondary PP point to point Secondary MP multipoint or Negotiable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 2 1 8 Link Station Address hex Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Local Devices gt Add None Any valid hexadecimal link station address from 0x01 to OxFE Specifies the address of the link station This parameter must match the polling address defined in the SDLC attached device Type Ox followed by the link station address N A A 30 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters PU Name Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Local Devices gt Add None Any valid 8 byte ASCII name Specifies the name of the adjacent link station This name uniquely identifies the station for statistics and alert messages Enter the 8 byte ASCII link station name 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 7 5 1 32 PU Type Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Local Devices gt Add None T1 0 T2 0 T2 1 T4 Specifies the type of the XID sending node This parameter is used with the IDBLOCK IDNUM and XID Format parameters to determine the station exchange identification XID value The value must match the PU type of the SDLC attached device For some dev
268. rt A 25 DLSw IP Virtual Ring A 14 DLSw RFC Version A 18 DLSw Virtual Ring ID A 5 Enable A 12 Initial Pacing Window A 20 KeepAlive Retries A 22 KeepAlive Retry Timer A 22 KeepAlive Time A 21 MAC Address Translation Support A 25 MAC Cache Age A 17 Maximum Package Size A 18 Multilslot Broadcasts A 20 NetBIOS Fallback Time A 23 NetBIOS Session Alive Filter A 21 Packaging Threshold A 19 Packaging Timeout A 19 Reject Unconfigured Peers A 17 SNA Fallback Attempts A 23 TCP Inact Method A 24 TCP Inact Time A 24 TCP Window Size A 13 Virtual Ring MTU A 16 IDBLOCK parameter A 32 IDNUM parameter A 34 Incoming Bandwidth parameter A 53 A 80 Incoming Burst Size parameter A 53 A 81 Initial Pacing Window parameter A 20 interface parameters Enable A 27 IP Address parameter A 8 A 59 A 60 IP multicast parameters Backup Config A 76 Backup End Time hhmm A 78 Backup Hold Down Time sec A 77 Backup IP Address A 76 Backup Max Up Time A 77 Backup Peer Type A 76 Backup Start Time hhmm A 78 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Multicast IP Address A 74 Slot A 74 K KeepAlive Retries parameter A 22 KeepAlive Retry Timer parameter A 22 KeepAlive Time parameter A 21 L learning capabilities 4 33 Link Station Address hex parameter A 30 Link Station Retries parameter A 40 link station roles 1 23 Link Station Timer parameter A 40 LLC conversion 1 22 LLC flow control 2 12 LLC2 media support
269. rtual SAP hex e Destination Host SAP hex 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Starting DLSw Services For information about these parameters see Appendix A Site Manager Parameters For each local device that you add Site Manager creates a corresponding SDLC link station which is how SDLC sees the local device Site Manager assigns several default parameter values to the link station For information about how to access and change the link station parameters see Configuring SDLC Services Once you add local devices you can access and change the local device parameters as described in Chapter 4 Customizing DLSw Services To enable DLSw over SDLC complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window select the synchronous connector on which you are enabling DLSw services The Add Circuit window opens Click on OK The WAN Protocols window opens 3 Choose SDLC Click on OK 5 Click on OK The SDLC Line Parameters window opens The Select Protocols window opens 6 Choose DLSw When you choose DLSw you automatically choose LLC2 Click on OK The DLSw Basic Global Parameters window opens Set the following parameters DLSw RFC Version e DLSw Virtual Ring ID hex DLSw Peer IP Address dual switch networks only Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 4
270. ry you do not need to configure DLSw peer entries because configuring a multicast IP entry allows for TCP connections to be established 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 21 Configuring DLSw Services Adding a DLSw Peer IP Table Entry The following sections describe how to add a DLSw peer IP table entry using the BCC or Site Manager Using the BCC To add a new DLSw peer IP table entry navigate to the dlsw global prompt for example box dlsw and enter peer lt peer_ip_addr gt peer_ip_ador is the IP address of a remote DLSw peer Adding this address to the DLSw IP peer table defines a configured peer to the local router The ranges are 0 0 0 0 through 223 255 255 255 and 240 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 For example to add a peer with the IP address 5 5 5 5 enter disw peer 5 5 5 5 peer 5 5 5 5 Using Site Manager To add a new DLSw peer IP table entry complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose Peer IP Table The DLSw Peer Configuration window opens Click on Add A second DLSw Peer Configuration window opens Set the Peer IP Address parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 44 6 Click on OK The first DLSw Peer Configuration window opens 7 Click on Done The Configuration Ma
271. s gt DLSw gt Prot Prioritization Outbound gt Peer Queue Entries 50 10 to 2147483647 Specifies the maximum number of packets in each of this peer s queues Enter a number of packets to increase or decrease the default buffer size of 50 packets 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 6 Max Queue Size Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Prot Prioritization Outbound gt Peer Queue Entries 16000 5000 to 2147483647 bytes Specifies the maximum size of each of this peer s queues Enter a number of bytes to increase or decrease the default queue size of 16000 bytes 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 7 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring DLSw Services Adding Queue Parameters The Add Queue window Figure A 31 contains two parameters that let you specify a queue number and a queue bandwidth for a configured DLSw peer Queue Number Queue Bandwidth Percent Figure A 31 Add Queue Window Parameter Queue Number Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Prot Prioritization Outbound gt Peer Queue Entries gt Queues gt Add Default 0 Options 0to9 Function Specifies the protocol priority queue number for a configured DLSw peer Instructions The first queue must be queue 0 You can number additional queues from 1 to 9 You do not need to number them in sequence although doing so may help you keep track of the queues on a peer MIB Object ID N A A 92 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Paramet
272. s DLSw node it is translated into the appropriate frame and carried to its destination Figure 1 7 shows how SNA devices use DLSw dual switch services to communicate over TCP IP This differs from adjacent single switch operation which uses LLC2 on the backbone 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Data Link Switching Overview th 0 Cluster controller NetBIO server SNA processor oO E L TCP IP network Bay Networks router 4 LLC2 gt lt 4 IP gt lt LLC2 or SDLC gt id te tr on et ec et e n ey ote a estana cadet es aan he oasis wt gt Logical connection DLS0004A Figure 1 7 DLSw Dual Switch Services for SNA Devices on LANs SNA PU Descriptions An SNA physical unit PU is a component of the network or node that manages and monitors the resources such as attached links and adjacent link stations associated with the node Several types of PUs exist PU 1 0 2 0 or 2 1 devices require boundary function assistance from an adjacent subarea node PU 4 and 5 devices are subarea nodes They use network addresses for routing and maintain routing tables that reflect the configuration of the network 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring DLSw Services PU 1 0 Support PU 1 0 devices include IBM 5251 5294 5394 and 5494 control unit emulations These devices are typically seen working with AS 4
273. s backbone from enterprise level applications using an APPN network 1 36 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Data Link Switching Overview In Figure 1 20 router 1 is running the DLSw APPN boundary function Router 2 is running DLSw only The path between the host on router 1 and the PU 2 0 device on router 2 shows all the components involved in a communication between the two devices The dependent logical unit requestor DLUR a component within APPN is required because the 3174 system is configured as PU 2 0 DLSw APPN DLSw router 1 router 2 a TCP IP TCP IP APPN DLSw DLSw LLC2 ccr j SDLC LLC2 Host B174 PU 2 0 Key DLUR dependent logical unit requestor Figure 1 20 End to End Connection Using a DLSw APPN Router and a DLSw Router DLS0037A 308622 14 00 Rev 00 1 37 Configuring DLSw Services In Figure 1 21 routers 1 and 2 are running the DLSw APPN boundary function The path between the PU 2 1 device on router 1 and a similar device on router 2 shows all the components involved in a communication between the two devices DLSw APPN router 1 DLSw APPN router 2 TCP IP DLS0055A Figure 1 21 End to End Connection Using Two DLSw APPN Routers 1 38 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Data Link Switching Overview RFC 2205 RSVP Support To ensure timely delivery of SNA traffic over an IP backbone RSVP Resource Reservation Protocol allows you to reserve bandwidth specificall
274. s ot_mask gt slot_mask is the slot or slots that you want to receive and transmit multicast data The values are all or none The default is all For example to change the IP address enter multicast ip 239 255 255 255 ip addr 224 0 1 0 multicast ip 224 0 1 0 Using Site Manager To edit the multicasting parameters for a selected slot complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Protocols menu opens choose Protocols 2 Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose Multicast IP Table The Multicast IP Table menu opens 4 Choose Multicast IP Table The DLSw Multicast Configuration window opens 5 Click on an IP multicast entry continued 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 51 Configuring DLSw Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 6 Edit the parameters you want Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 75 7 Click on Done The Configuration Manager window opens Configuring DLSw Backup Peers When you configure a primary peer you can also configure a peer to back up the primary peer connection The backup peer feature includes a backup peer IP address a maximum backup connection time a holddown wait time before considering the primary connection is unavailable and starting the backup connection and a time interval to ensur
275. se DLSw operation involves the complex interaction of multiple subsystems administrators should also be familiar with SDLC TCP and LLC Viewing the DLSw Log You view the log file containing Nortel Networks event and debug messages using the Nortel Networks network management software Site Manager the Nortel Networks command line interface Technician Interface the Bay Command Console BCC or any compatible third party network management software 308622 14 00 Rev 00 C 1 Configuring DLSw Services For information about viewing events and messages using Site Manager or a compatible third party network management software see Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager For a complete description of all warning fault trace and informational messages refer to Event Messages for Routers For information on viewing events using the Technician Interface see Using Technician Interface Software Enabling Extended Logging Subsystems such as LLC and SDLC allow you to enable extended logging through the MIB Extended logging provides additional messages and information that can help you identify and troubleshoot a DLSw network problem However using extended logging causes the router to use more log space and memory and affects CPU performance You enable extended logging using the Nortel Networks Technician Interface Table C 1 lists each subsystem the Technician Interface command that enables extended loggi
276. segment Ethernet 802 3 segment DLS0018A Figure 2 5 Translation Bridge Services The translation bridge service e Supports communication between systems on SRB and Ethernet 802 3 segments locally attached to the same router e Maps between SRB and Ethernet 802 3 framing requirements Using DLSw Independently of the Translation Bridge You can use DLSw independently of the translation bridge to allow an Ethernet attached device to communicate with a device attached to an SRB network such as token ring DLSw provides local termination while the translation bridge provides the end to end connection The translation bridge supports the bridge media while DLSw supports the Ethernet networks Note If you enable BAN2 termination see Chapter 4 for instructions DLSw locally terminates SRB and LLC2 frames at the router The router then forwards the traffic to the token ring network using DLSw In Figure 2 6 router A uses DLSw to convert traffic between the locally attached Ethernet and token ring interfaces The token ring and Ethernet attached devices also use DLSw to communicate with Ethernet devices attached to router C 2 8 308622 14 00 Rev 00 DLSw Implementation Notes Ethernet 1 Ethernet 2 DLSw converts Ethernet 1 traffic to Token ring Router B Router C Token ring attached devices communicate with gt devices on Ethernet 2 DLS0027A Figure 2 6 In
277. si C 22 DLSw Interface Troubleshooting weiiccsccissscdsneiotsssorsunsdessniunsseontitarsesensnee C 23 TCP Troubleshooting 0 A rie ere uate C 24 SNA TRS MOG WUD cx pi teccseesctyaeets auecinnis sea cleaalia a a C 25 NetBIOS Troubleshooting sictissssaiiicxcsssuoetssuetinixtoniisirdeeaiuebteesidiotieseetouts C 26 LLC THOS STRONG seceicck cnsceinste sted inniinn areae Ene C 27 SDLG Toues Hoot siruenta naan A N C 27 BLN and BCN Synchronous Interface Cables opeta eer C 30 AN ARN ASN and EASF Synchronous Interface Cables C 30 Octal Syne Interlace CASS iirinn ainiaan ka C 31 Male No Modem Cables cas cia casinos caccannonevdcaeanseraccinasosudertesssuicumeennanes C 31 308622 14 00 Rev 00 xvii Preface This guide describes data link switching DLSw and what you do to start and customize DLSw services on a Nortel Networks router You can use the Bay Command Console BCC or Site Manager to configure DLSw on a router In this guide you will find instructions for using both the BCC and Site Manager Before You Begin Before using this guide you must complete the following procedures For a new router e Install the router see the installation guide that came with your router e Connect the router to the network and create a pilot configuration file see Quick Starting Routers Configuring BayStack Remote Access or Connecting ASN Routers to a Network Make sure that you are running
278. sion 2 0 Router 308622 14 00 Rev 00 C 37 Configuring DLSw Services Figure C 9 shows a capabilities exchange between two Nortel Networks routers running DLSw Version 2 0 A UDP or Unknown peer is configured on one of the routers End Router station Version 2 0 Router Host with peer configured Version 2 0 L Heeren ing SI rmo EE To p ae Single TCP connection CapexMsg with version 2 tcp conn 1 vendor specific 000045 ___ Capex positive response CapexMsg with version 2 tcp conn 1 vendor specific 000045 Capex positive response See See data flows DLSO0049A Figure C 9 Exchange Between Two Routers Running DLSw Version 2 0 UDP or Unknown Peer on One Router C 38 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Troubleshooting DLSw Networks Figure C 10 shows a capabilities exchange between a Nortel Networks router running RFC 1795 and one running Version 2 0 A peer is configured on the router running RFC 1795 End Router station RFC1795 Router Host 2 0 CS with peer configured ip Version Ge oken ring E network z PS CapexMsg with version 1 tcp conn 2 Y Capex positive response CapexMsg with version 1 tcp conn 2 ve
279. st enable SRB on this interface When you select BAN SRB is automatically enabled and you must configure it Specifically e If SRB has not been previously configured on the router the SRB Global Parameters screen appears e The SRB Interface Parameters screen appears For more information about configuring SRB see Configuring Bridging Services Note If you configure two token ring interfaces or a token ring interface and a frame relay BAN interface on a DLSw single switch the traffic between the two interfaces uses SRB not DLSw However if you enable BAN2 termination for the router see Chapter 4 for instructions the traffic between the interfaces uses DLSw 308622 14 00 Rev 00 3 15 Configuring DLSw Services To enable DLSw over frame relay BAN complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window select the synchronous connector on which you are enabling DLSw services The Add Circuit window opens 2 Click on OK The WAN Protocols window opens 3 Choose Frame Relay 4 Click on OK The Select Protocols window opens 5 Choose DLSw When you choose DLSw you automatically choose LLC2 6 Click on OK The Frame Relay SNA Connection window opens 7 Click on BAN The DLSw Basic Global Parameters window opens 8 Set the following parameters SR Internal LAN ID DLSw RFC Version DLSw Virtu
280. st frame size that will be received 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 7 5 1 7 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 37 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Canureach Timer Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Local Devices gt Add 30 0 to 3600 s Specifies the time interval in seconds after which the router sends a CANUREACH message to the remote DLSw peer to establish a session Enter the number of seconds you want for the time interval For example enter 1 to transmit a CANUREACH message once per second or enter 3600 to transmit the message once per hour Enter 0 if you do not want to transmit a CANUREACH message 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 12 1 11 Canureach Retries Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Local Devices gt Add 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 Specifies the number of times a CANUREACH message is initially sent to the remote DLSw peer to establish a session Enter the number of retries you want Enter 0 if you do not want to transmit CANUREACH messages Leave the default value 4294967295 to send an infinite number of CANUREACH messages for this connection 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 12 1 12 A 38 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Canureach Timer2 Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Local Devic
281. t XID T2 1 rsp O SABME UA p RR Figure C 4 IP Router RFC 1434 Host network uae Dual TCP connection establishment lt CANUREACH So ICANREACH XIDFRAME XIDFRAME XIDFRAME XIDFRAME CONTACT CONTACTED TestP TestF Null XIDP nn at Null XIDF lt XID T2 1 req lt XID T2 1 rsp SABME e UA y RNR y DLS0044A Data Flow for Routers Running RFC 1434 PU 2 1 over LLC 308622 14 00 Rev 00 C 33 Configuring DLSw Services Figure C 5 shows the data flow between two Nortel Networks routers running RFC 1795 End station Router RFC 1795 ic TestF o establishment ies eens CANUREACH ex SSS ICANREACH_ex 2A XIDP XIDF pp Router RFC 1795 IP m network S a Fe ye Dual TCP connection Capabilities exchange CANUREACH_cs ICANREACH_cs REACHACK XIDFRAME XIDFRAME C 12 for mo Remaining data flows are the same as in RFC 1434 See Figures C 9 to re details Host TestP TestF TestP TestF XIDP XIDF lt Figure C 5 Data Flow for Routers Running RFC 1795 DLSO0045A 308622 14 00 Rev 00 C 34 Troubleshooting DLSw Networks Figure C 6 shows the data flow between
282. t Figure 1 15 illustrates the connection of a host through a frame relay network in a configuration with multiprotocol traffic to other locations Client Figure 1 15 Single switch DLSw Host Frame relay network Bay Networks router DLSw TCP IP C a Client Bay Networks router Sample Frame Relay Network DLS0007A 1 28 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Data Link Switching Overview Nortel Networks provides two ways to communicate directly with an SNA processor such as an IBM 3745 or AS 400 over frame relay e Boundary Network Node BNN e Boundary Access Node BAN Boundary Network Node RFC 1490 BNN refers to RFC 1490 Routed SNA over Frame Relay This implementation of LLC2 also complies with the frame relay Forum 3 FRE3 Multiple Protocol Encapsulation over Frame Relay Implementation Agreements which defines how SNA traffic traverses a frame relay network BNN allows native SNA traffic originating from SDLC LAN or WAN attached devices to communicate directly over public or private frame relay networks with an SNA processor Devices can communicate with intermediate routing nodes or in a single switch configuration function as a FRAD Since BNN does not carry the destination and source MAC addresses in the network packets the BNN format carries the fewest number
283. t ID Site Manager Parameters Multislot Cache Update Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Advanced gt Global Enabled Enabled Disabled Allows broadcast messages inbound from the DLC to be sent to all active DLSw slots thereby preventing peers from establishing connections to multiple local DLSw slots This parameter allows you to control the number of TCP connections and the amount of broadcast traffic on the network Accept the default Enabled or choose Disabled 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 49 MAC Address Translation Support Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Advanced gt Global Disabled Enabled Disabled Enables or disables MAC address translation Accept the default Disabled or choose Enabled Choosing Enabled activates the MAC Address Translation Table option from the DLSw menu This option lets you specify an original destination MAC address and the destination address to which you want to translate it 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 50 Ban2 Termination Support Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Advanced gt Global Disabled Enabled Disabled Enables or disables BAN2 termination BAN2 termination allows you to locally terminate at the router SRB and LLC 2 frames destined for a token ring or frame relay network The router then forwards the traffic to the destination network using DLSw Accept the default Disabled or choose Enabled 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 51
284. t of broadcast traffic on the network e Under RFCs 1434 and 1795 to establish a network connection an end station an SNA or NetBIOS application first sends a DLSw SSP CanuReach or NETBIOS_NQ message to all routers that are part of the DLSw network Ina large network with many end stations these connection attempts result in a large number of packets traveling on the network Also under RFCs 1434 and 1795 TCP connections must be constantly maintained between all participating routers within the DLSw network e Under RFC 2166 network connections are established only when needed and maintained only as long the end stations require In addition end stations use multicast IP to send the initial CanuReach or NetBIOS messages thus reducing the amount of traffic on the network By default DLSw operates in RFC 1434 mode You can use either the Site Manager parameter DLSw RFC Version or the BCC command rfc type to configure DLSw in RFC 2166 multicast mode For instructions see Configuring DLSw for IP Multicasting on page 4 47 Configuring IP Multicast Protocols on the Router A router configured for DLSw with IP multicasting support must also be running e IP Internet Protocol e IGMP Internet Gateway Management Protocol e DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol MOSPF Multicast Open Shortest Path First or both You must configure IP on at least one slot on the router and assign an IP address to each DLSw slot
285. tch router e Upon receiving the ICANREACH the originating router Caches the MAC address or NetBIOS name and identity of the remote router in the appropriate table on the router Converts the ICANREACH back to a TEST RESPONSE frame Forwards the packet to the originating workstation At completion all routers and end stations can forward SNA and NetBIOS packets appropriately creating a logical session between end points Each slot on a Nortel Networks router running DLSw functions as an independent data link switch The network administrator controls the packets forwarded to DLSw by specifying the appropriate SAPs in the DLSw SAP table Establishing DLSw LLC Connections Figure C 1 illustrates a sample dual switch DLSw network and the network packet exchanges transactions that occur when two DLSw routers connect to each other Connections generate debug event messages in the log file These messages provide critical information that can help you troubleshoot or report network connection problems Figure C 1 identifies each transaction with a message number Use this number to point to the specific debug message that describes the network activity C 8 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Troubleshooting DLSw Networks Ethernet C a pen TCP IP Router A T Router B Host Terminal LLC PU 2 0 Router B log file message
286. te change in ssp_contact conn 30927 70 old state 4 new state 3 Router A sends an acknowledgment UA packet to the host computer 14 04 25 95 22 43 01 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 17 LLC connect_conf frame received The DLSw circuit reaches the CONNECTED state Router A and router B return receiver ready RR packets to their clients 15 04 25 95 22 43 01 DEBUG SLOT 1 DLS Event Code 16 State change in connect_conf conn 30927f70 old state 3 new state 1 Establishing DLSw SDLC Connections Figure C 2 illustrates a sample dual switch DLSw SDLC network and the network packet exchanges that occur during SDLC connection establishment Connection establishment generates debug event messages in the log file 308622 14 00 Rev 00 C 11 Configuring DLSw Services Token ring TCP IP Host Router A Router B Terminal SDLC PU 2 0 Router B log file message number s SDLC circuit active DLSw activates a CANUREACHh lt Test P Test F gt ICANREACH gt lt REACHACK lt lt XIDFRAME NULL lt __ NULL xID P 481 NULL XID F gt XIDFRAME NULL gt gt lt ______ XIDFRAME T2 482 484 lt UA lt _ RNR CONTACT gt UA lt _ CONTACTED DLS0033A Figure C 2 Sample DLSw SDLC Network Conne
287. te end station from a local end station at this SAP address as follows 1 As the local end station sends frames that the remote end station has yet to acknowledge a counter on the remote DLSw switch increments 2 When this counter reaches half the value specified in the SAP Window parameter the remote DLSw switch sends a flow control indication back to the local DLSw switch This step is actually part of DLSw RFC 1434 fixed flow control 3 The local DLSw switch sends RNR receiver not ready messages to the local end station to control the flow of the session 4 As the remote end station acknowledges frames the counter on the remote DLSw switch decrements 5 After the remote end station acknowledges all outstanding frames the remote DLSw switch sends an end flow control indication back to the local DLSw switch 308622 14 00 Rev 00 DLSw Implementation Notes 6 The local DLSw switch then sends an RR receiver ready message to the local end station thereby allowing it to send more frames TCP Flow Control Each pair of TCP connections between DLSw peers carries data from many LLC2 sessions When congestion occurs on the TCP IP network between DLSw peers TCP e Reduces or closes its transmit window e Signals the local and remote LLC2 interfaces to assert flow control on any LLC2 connections associated with the congested TCP connections DLSw Flow Control A counter on the remote DLSw switch increments as the loca
288. ters DLSw Networking Overview DLSw provides a standards based mechanism for reliably transporting connection oriented Systems Network Architecture SNA and NetBIOS data across a network Originally defined in RFC 1434 currently defined in RFC 1795 then enhanced in DLSw Version 2 and RFC 2166 DLSw resolves the issues associated with transporting SNA and NetBIOS information across a multiprotocol backbone Specifically DLSw e Prevents sessions from timing out due to slow network response time e Automatically reroutes traffic around failed links e Improves response time by reducing network overhead e Enables multiple locations to interconnect without requiring a network manager to reconfigure existing bridges Nortel Networks DLSw Implementation The Nortel Networks DLSw implementation adds several benefits including e Symmetric multiprocessor architecture providing a highly scalable and reliable implementation e Advanced flow control ensuring that the router based network delivers information as reliably as existing SNA networks e Integrated SDLC to LLC2 conversion enabling you to reduce the cost of front end processor FEP ports for example 3745 maintenance and software e RFC 1490 LLC2 over frame relay support enabling a Nortel Networks router to communicate across a frame relay network directly to a front end processor or other device that supports this protocol e DLSw prioritization allowing preferred DLSw
289. th to the target system using standard source route bridge broadcasts e DLSw or SRB whichever receives a response first takes precedence The slower subsystem ceases any further attempts to support a connection to the target program Note It is possible to configure SRB traffic filters to drop traffic from the SRB path while permitting connection over DLSw 308622 14 00 Rev 00 2 5 Configuring DLSw Services SRB packet gt Router Forward to DLSw Forward to SRB DLS0028A Figure 2 3 DLSw and Source Route Bridging on SRB Circuits DLSw and Bridging Services This section presents the different types of bridging services that coexist on a circuit with DLSw and explains any differences in TEST or explorer frame handling on these circuits This information is useful when you examine traffic on LANs locally attached to the router DLSw on an Ethernet 802 3 Circuit The router supports DLSw configured on an Ethernet 802 3 circuit The DLSw software provides bridging services between Ethernet 802 3 LAN segments locally attached to the same router The DLSw interface takes precedence over the transparent bridge interface whenever the destination SAP address identified in a TEST frame received from the local circuit already exists in the router s DLSw configuration In this case only the DLSw interface e Captures the locally received TEST frame e Attempts to locate the destination SAP address specified
290. their successors whichever is applicable 6 Use of Software in the European Community This provision applies to all Software acquired for use within the European Community If Licensee uses the Software within a country in the European Community the Software Directive enacted by the Council of European Communities Directive dated 14 May 1991 will apply to the examination of the Software to facilitate interoperability Licensee agrees to notify Nortel Networks of any such intended examination of the Software and may procure support and assistance from Nortel Networks 7 Term and termination This license is effective until terminated however all of the restrictions with respect to Nortel Networks copyright in the Software and user manuals will cease being effective at the date of expiration of the Nortel Networks copyright those restrictions relating to use and disclosure of Nortel Networks confidential information shall continue in effect Licensee may terminate this license at any time The license will automatically terminate if Licensee fails to comply with any of the terms and conditions of the license Upon termination for any reason Licensee will immediately destroy or return to Nortel Networks the Software user manuals and all copies Nortel Networks is not liable to Licensee for damages in any form solely by reason of the termination of this license 8 Export and Re export Licensee agrees not to export directly or indirectly t
291. ther SRB traffic Note You can apply both circuit level and TCP level prioritization to DLSw traffic Note that TCP level prioritization alone does not give DLSw traffic precedence over other routing protocols For information about circuit level prioritization see Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization 1 44 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Chapter 2 DLSw Implementation Notes This chapter provides important information about the Nortel Networks DLSw implementation If you are configuring DLSw on a network for the first time you should review this chapter It covers the following topics Topic Page DLSw and Other Subsystems 2 2 Combining DLSw and SRB 2 2 DLSw and Bridging Services 26 Parallel Bridge and DLSw Paths 2 9 Multiple DLSw Peers on a LAN 2 10 Memory Requirements 2 1 TCP Considerations 2 11 Flow Control 2 12 DLSw Packaging 2 1 DLSw Prioritization 2 14 Backup Peers 2 21 308622 14 00 Rev 00 2 1 Configuring DLSw Services DLSw and Other Subsystems A DLSw network configuration uses the services of other network subsystems When you select DLSw on an interface the router software automatically selects the required subsystems In some configurations the software requires that you edit the parameters associated with these subsystems Some parameters have default values that you can either accept or edit To simplify the editing of additional
292. therwise disclose to any third party the Software or any information about the operation design performance or implementation of the Software and user manuals that is confidential to Nortel Networks and its licensors however Licensee may grant permission to its consultants subcontractors and agents to use the Software at Licensee s facility provided they have agreed to use the Software only in accordance with the terms of this license 3 Limited warranty Nortel Networks warrants each item of Software as delivered by Nortel Networks and properly installed and operated on Nortel Networks hardware or other equipment it is originally licensed for to function substantially as described in its accompanying user manual during its warranty period which begins on the date Software is first shipped to Licensee If any item of Software fails to so function during its warranty period as the sole remedy Nortel Networks will at its discretion provide a suitable fix patch or workaround for the problem that may be included in a future Software release Nortel Networks further warrants to Licensee that the media on which the Software is provided will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of 90 days from the date Software is first shipped to Licensee Nortel Networks will replace defective media at no charge if it is returned to Nortel Networks during the warranty period along with proof of the date of shipment This w
293. tion AT inen arehant A Sobel cia eee 1 6 eg epee Uo cae T iiterc sient a 9 g cee rene eee ee nE EN rrerrrec errr rrr rrre 1 6 Differences Between RFC 2166 and RFC 1795 o0 eecccessceeeeceseeeeceseeeseeeeetsaeeeeeneees 1 7 Configuring IP Multicast Protocols on the Router c ccccccssseceeeeesteeeeessteeeeeenaas 1 7 Assigning an IP Multicast Group Address to a Slot c ccesceeeeeeeeseeeeteeeeeessaeeeteneees 1 8 Sample Connection Using DLSw and IP Multicasting E E 1 9 DLSw Single Switch and Dual Switch Services 20 0 eccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeens 1 11 IG eo MNS Ar WHS e a a E A E 1 13 ERAD OPSTAO auni pane danctpmeraduats aaleatenp aadeactaaaacts 1 14 SILOS ESR srias disn Iak E RN E lees 1 15 GLEC IY sisson ana aA 1 15 Dual SRG SPIO accipias a 1 16 308622 14 00 Rev 00 V SNA PU Seri OS asrorni aia E 1 17 PU 1 0 Support sirsie itdi ANT ET aeai inna ear T haori E n 1 18 IAEE Tl cles E E E E E T 1 18 PUZ bo cles sena a a 1 18 PU 4A SOPPOT nrsrcamercmmeias P ere P E E ere E T 1 18 PUS SUD PON sirrini E aa ERO OSA 2 ATM Adapter Support for SNA Connectivity 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeseeeeeeesaeeeeenes 1 20 Sample Configurations Using OSA 2 ATM Adapter ccccssceceeeeeessceeseeeeeeeseeetenes 1 21 ELG SUPP TE aia hanes a anyon cdc ER tie lucie ia abate ppegenen anne anauee abaaead 1 22 SDLC Support E E E E P rence E rere E Ter eee 1 23 Poman SDLG SU
294. tions see Editing a Local Device on page 4 1 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Data Link Switching Overview Note The following operations are not supported for PU 4 links Downline Load of the NCP and Dump Figure 1 8 shows two DLSw routers Each router connects two IBM 3745 devices one using SDLC and the other using token ring The routers are connected to each other using TCP IP IBM 3745 IBM 3745 oO oO E TCP IP E Router network Router SDLC SDLC oO oO IBM 3745 IBM 3745 DLS0042A Figure 1 8 Routers Connecting IBM 3745 Devices 308622 14 00 Rev 00 1 19 Configuring DLSw Services PU 5 Support PU 5 is the mainframe and is fully supported as the end point in a connection to other PU types A mainframe with an integrated communications adapter or an Open Systems adapter is a PU type 5 PU 2 0 PU 2 1 and PU 4 devices downstream from a PU 5 are supported across DLSw using either FID2 or FID4 data flows only OSA 2 ATM Adapter Support for SNA Connectivity The Open Systems Adapter 2 OSA 2 supports token ring Ethernet and ATM The Nortel Networks router will operate using any of these media This section describes only the O
295. tivity Method WAN Keepalive Time Package Maximum Size Package Timeout Package Threshold Multislot Broadcasts Initial Pacing Window NetBIOS Alive Filter Keepalive Retry Timer Keepalive Retries SNA Fallback Attempts NetBIOS Fallback Time Multislot DLC Broadcasts Monitoring DLSw Using the BCC show Commands Whether all no or specific debug level 2 messages will be logged Specific messages are for subfunctional elements for example general info 1 backup peer events The time in seconds before terminating an inactive TCP connection The type of connection that will cause a TCP connection to terminate when the TCP inactivity time expires circuits data never Frequency in seconds with which the router sends a signal to the peer router to check that the peer router is working correctly and can receive messages The maximum size of frame to send over the WAN The time interval in milliseconds to delay a package before sending it to TCP The percentage of the DLSw TCP window that must be in use if DLSw is to delay sending a package Whether broadcasting of received CANUREACH frames over DLSw slots is enabled or disabled The initial number of received data frames that the local DLSw router permits during an established connection with another DLSw router running RFC 1795 DLSw Version 2 or RFC 2166 Whether the NetBIOS session alive frame transmissions are enabled or disabled The max
296. ts parameter A 20 N NetBIOS Cache Age parameter A 17 NetBIOS Fallback Time parameter A 23 NetBIOS Name parameter A 63 NetBIOS Peer IP Address parameter A 64 NetBIOS Session Alive Filter parameter A 21 NetBIOS sample template 4 69 Non Peak End Time parameter A 55 A 83 Index 3 Non Peak Incoming Bandwidth parameter A 54 A 82 Non Peak Incoming Burst Size parameter A 55 RSVP global parameters Non Peak Incoming Burst Size A 82 Non Peak Outgoing Bandwidth parameter A 54 A 81 Non Peak Outgoing Burst Size parameter A 54 RSVP globla parameters Non Peak Outgiong Burst Size A 81 Non Peak Start Time parameter A 55 A 82 Non Peak Starting Days parameter A 56 A 83 O Original Destination MAC Address parameter A 84 OSA 2 ATM adapter support 1 20 Outgoing Bandwidth parameter A 52 A 80 Outgoing Burst Size parameter A 53 A 80 P packaging configuring A 18 multiple DLSw frames 2 13 Packaging Threshold parameter A 19 Packaging Timeout parameter A 19 parallel data paths in SRB topology 2 10 using 2 9 peer IP address 4 17 Peer IP Address parameter A 6 A 44 peer types TCP 4 18 UDP 4 18 Unknown 4 18 peers learning mechanism 4 33 multiple 2 10 performance and DLSw packaging 2 13 PP for Unconfigured Peers parameter A 87 primary link stations 1 23 primary SDLC operations 1 24 prioritization Index 4 Max Queue Size parameter A 46 A 91 Protocol Priority p
297. ts you change the default NetBIOS peer that you associated with a NetBIOS client or server DLSw NetBIOS Peer Configuration fin4 Delete Apply Values Help Fd ___ aa Default NetBios Peer IP Address 198 42 61 5 B Figure A 17 DLSw NetBIOS Peer Configuration Window A 64 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Default NetBIOS Peer IP Address Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Default NetBIOS None Any valid 32 bit IP address in the form network host using dotted decimal notation Specifies the IP address of the remote DLSw peer that can reach the NetBIOS client server system or application currently selected in the DLSw NetBIOS Peer Configuration window Type the IP address of the DLSw peer that can reach the remote client server or application currently selected in the DLSw NetBIOS Peer Configuration window The router adds this IP address to the list of configured peers in the local DLSw peer IP table 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 11 1 3 Adding DLSw MAC Peer IP Table Entry Parameters The DLSw MAC Configuration window Figure A 18 contains parameters that allow you to add entries to the DLSw default MAC peer IP table The DLSw default MAC peer IP table contains the list of all remote SNA systems and applications that you can access via DLSw connection services on the local router Each entry
298. ttempts to use this configured transport option when establishing a TCP connection with the remote peer The Transport Type parameter is available only when the DLSw RFC Version parameter is set to V2 0 A remote peer configured with the transport type TCP operates in RFC 1795 mode A remote peer configured with the transport type UDP operates in DLSw Version 2 0 mode only When set to UDP the router does not make any attempts to revert to RFC 1795 An unknown peer operates in DLSw Version 2 0 mode Unless a TCP connection already exists the local peer uses UDP explorer frames to locate the remote peer MAC address prior to establishing the connection The unknown peer can revert to RFC 1795 if there is no response to the UDP explorer frames Click on Values and select TCP UDP or Unknown If you select Unknown use the SNA Fallback Attempts parameter to set the number of connection attempts using UDP explorer frames before reverting to earlier RFCs 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 10 Peer Interoperability Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table Enabled Enabled Disabled Allows Nortel Networks routers to operate with other vendors routers Select the default Enabled or choose Disabled 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 17 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 47 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options
299. ued 3 18 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Starting DLSw Services Site Manager Procedure continued Starting DLSw over QLLC You do this System responds 14 Click on OK The LLC2 Frame Relay Mappings window opens 15 Click on Done The Configuration Manager window opens To configure an X 25 network interface circuit for QLLC Add an entry to the QLLC mapping table refer to Configuring X 25 1 3 Services for instructions Configure the QLLC mapping parameters refer to Configuring X 25 Services for instructions Configure DLSw over X 25 circuits To enable DLSw over QLLC complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure 1 You do this In the Configuration Manager window select the X 25 circuit on which you are enabling DLSw services System responds The Edit Connector window opens 2 Click on Edit Circuit 3 Choose X 25 The Circuit Definition window opens The X 25 menu opens 4 Choose Services The X 25 Service Configuration window opens 5 Choose Protocols 6 Choose Add Delete 7 Choose DLSw 8 Click on OK The DLSw Basic Global Parameters window opens continued 308622 14 00 Rev 00 3 19 Configuring DLSw Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 9 Set the following parameters DLSw RFC Version e DLSw Virtual Ring ID hex DLSw Peer IP Address dual switch netwo
300. uest for connection over UDP one TCP connection is expected the backup peer cannot fall back to RFC 1795 mode e RFC 2166 Multicast Send the request for connection to the multicast address configured in the Backup IP Address field The Backup Peer Type cannot exceed the global DLS RFC type on the router For example if the DLSw global RFC type for the router is RFC 2166 multicast the backup peer can be any of the available values If the RFC type is V2 0 unicast the backup peer cannot be multicast If the RFC type is RFC 1795 the backup peer cannot be multicast V2 0 UDP V2 0 Unknown or V2 0 TCP For instructions on configuring a backup peer for RFC 2166 multicast and the other DLSw versions see Chapter 4 Customizing DLSw Services 308622 14 00 Rev 00 2 21 Chapter 3 Starting DLSw Services This chapter describes how to create basic DLSw configurations by specifying parameter values where required and accepting default values for all other parameters Topic Page Starting Configuration Tools 3 2 DLSw Configuration Hierarchy 3 2 Starting DLSw Globally 3 3 Starting DLSw over Ethernet 3 4 Starting DLSw over Token Ring 3 6 Starting DLSw over FDDI 3 8 Starting DLSw over SDLC 3 10 Starting DLSw over Frame Relay 3 15 Starting DLSw over QLLC 219 Starting DLSw over ATM LANE 3 20 Deleting DLSw from a Router 3 22 308622 14 00 Rev 00 3 1 Configuri
301. values are yes or no the default is no backup start time lt bu_start_time gt bu_start_time is the start time when a configured backup peer is available The values are 0 to 2400 The default is 1 backup type lt bu_type gt bu_type specifies the type of this DLSw backup peer The values are multicast v20udp v20unknown v20tcp or tcp1795 The default is v20unknown For example to change the backup type to multicast enter multicast ip 239 255 255 255 backup type multicast 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 53 Configuring DLSw Services Using Site Manager Note This procedure assumes that you have already configured IP multicasting using the procedure in Configuring DLSw for IP Multicasting To configure DLSw backup peers for an RFC 2166 multicast peer complete the following steps Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens 2 Choose DLSw 3 Choose Multicast IP Table The DLSw menu opens The DLSw Multicast Configuration window opens 4 Click on an IP multicast entry Edit the following parameters Backup Config e Backup IP Address Backup Peer Type Backup Max Up Time sec Backup Hold Down Time sec Backup Start Time hhmm Backup End Time hhmm Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 76 6 Click on Apply to save your ch
302. ve retries setting Enter a value in the range 0 to 600 seconds 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 30 KeepAlive Retries Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Advanced gt Global 4 0 to 99 TCP determines a lost connection either a failed link with no rerouting possible or the remote router is unavailable when TCP attempts to deliver data If TCP does not receive an acknowledgment to transmitted keepalive packets after a series of retries it declares the connection inoperable and informs DLSw The TCP KeepAlive Retries is the number of times TCP attempts to establish or maintain a connection Enter a value in the range 0 to 99 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 31 A 22 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters SNA Fallback Attempts Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Advanced gt Global 5 0 to 2147483647 Specifies the maximum number of attempts the local router should make when establishing a connection with a remote DLSw peer before reverting to earlier DLSw RFCs The SNA Fallback Attempts parameter operates with DLSw Version 2 peers that you configured with the Transport Type parameter set to Unknown An unknown peer operates in DLSw Version 2 0 mode Unless a TCP connection already exists the local peer will use UDP explorer
303. w The RFC implementation to run on the router Accept or reject TCP sessions with Nortel Networks or other DLSw peers not defined in the peer table The output for show disw global advanced includes the following information State Total Circuits Virtual Ring ID Virtual Ring MTU Internal LAN ID Bridge ID TCP Window Size Maximum Slot Sessions MAC Age Time NetBIOS Age Time RFC Type Unconfigured Peers Debug Level 1 State of the DLSw service up down init initializing disabled or absent Total number of circuits on the router running DLSw The standard ring number that SRB uses to identify traffic that DLSw places on the SRB LAN MTU size for frames sent from local LAN attached systems to systems on remote LANs Source routing internal LAN ID Source routing base bridge number The size in bytes of the windows used for the DLSw TCP connections The maximum number of LLC2 sessions to support per slot The time in seconds before inactive MAC addresses are aged out of the cache The time in seconds before inactive NetBIOS names are aged out of the cache The RFC implementation to run on the router rfc1434 rfc1795 v2Ounicast rfc2166 Accept or reject TCP sessions with Nortel Networks or other DLSw peers not defined in the peer table Whether all or no debug level 1 messages will be logged all or none 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Debug Level 2 TCP Inactivity Time TCP Inac
304. w APPN boundary function resides in a regional location This enterprise wide network has an APPN backbone The regional location connects to the backbone through an IP network APPN PU 2 1 my T E PU 2 1 VTAM host PU 2 0 a oe A T PU 2 1 VTAM host PU 2 1 EC D a PU 2 0 a PU 2 0 VTAM host PU 2 1 DLSO0035A Figure 1 18 Enterprise APPN Network 308622 14 00 Rev 00 1 35 Configuring DLSw Services DLSw APPN Components APPN and DLSw pass messages back and forth by means of a virtual circuit VCCT at the data link level Figure 1 19 shows the relationship between APPN DLSw and the VCCT through which they exchange messages APPN DLSw External link 1 External link 2 Key VCCT virtual circuit Figure 1 19 Boundary Function Virtual Circuit DLS0036A APPN and DLSw send and receive messages on external links 1 and 2 and pass messages to each other through the virtual circuit The DLSw APPN boundary function allows DLSw to provide remote communications via an IP backbone and provide access over thi
305. w Peer To configure priority queues for a specific DLSw peer complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens 8 Set the following parameters e Queue Number e Queue Bandwidth Percent Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 92 2 Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens 3 Choose Prot Prioritization Outbound 4 Choose Peer Queue Entries The Peer Queue Configuration window opens 5 Click on the individual peer address on which to configure priority queues 6 Click on Queues The Add Edit Delete Queues window opens 7 Click on Add The Add Queue window opens Click on OK 10 Click on Done The Add Edit Delete Queues window opens The Peer Queue Configuration window opens 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 67 Configuring DLSw Services Enabling or Disabling a Single Peer s Priority Queues To enable or disable the queues that you configured for an individual DLSw peer complete the following tasks Note When you enable priority queues using the Peer Queue Configuration window you must use that window to disable that peer s queues You cannot disable queues that are already active from the Global DLSw PP Parameters Defaults window Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In t
306. w RFC Version 20 UNICAST DLSw Virtual Ring ID hex Oxi DLSw Reject Unconfigured Peers ACCEPT DLSw NetBIOS Support NO DLSw RSVP Support ENABLED DLSw Peer IP Address add only 0 0 0 0 Figure A 1 DLSw Basic Global Parameters Window Parameter DLSw RFC Version Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Basic Global Default RFC1434 Options RFC1434 RFC1795 V2 0 Unicast RFC2166 Multicast Function Selects the RFC implementation to run on the router RFC 1434 RFC 1795 DLSw Version 2 0 or RFC 2166 Instructions Click on Values and select RFC 1434 RFC 1795 V2 0 or RFC 2166 See Chapter 1 Data Link Switching Overview for detailed information on these RFCs MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 28 A 4 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters DLSw Virtual Ring ID hex Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Basic Global None Any valid unassigned ring number from 1 to 4095 0x001 to OXFFF in hexadecimal format Specifies a standard ring number that SRB uses to identify traffic that is placed on the SRB LAN by DLSvw This ring number is the first entry in the packet s routing information field RIF The ring number must be unique within the network However all Nortel Networks routers on the
307. w that must be in use if DLSw is to delay sending a package one that is currently being built The values are 0 to 100 The default is 20 percent package_timeout is the time interval in milliseconds to delay a package before sending it to TCP The values are 0 to 2147483647 The default is 10 For example to configure a DLSw package with a maximum size of 1000 bytes a threshold of 50 percent and a timeout of 100 enter disw package max size 1000 package threshold 50 package timeout 100 dlsw 308622 14 00 Rev 00 4 41 Configuring DLSw Services Using Site Manager To configure DLSw packaging complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens Choose DLSw The DLSw menu opens Choose Advanced The Edit DLSw Global Parameters window opens Set the following parameters Maximum Package Size Packaging Timeout msec Packaging Threshold Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 18 Click on OK The Configuration Manager window opens 4 42 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing DLSw Services Configuring the DLSw APPN Boundary Function Instructions for configuring the DLSw APPN boundary function are covered under the following topics Topic Page Step 1 Configuring DLSw and AP
308. width Non Peak Outgoing Burst Size Non Peak Incoming Bandwidth Non Peak Incoming Burst Size Figure A 11 Edit DLSw Peer RSVP Parameters Window 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 51 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID RSVP Mode Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table gt DLSw RSVP USE GLOBAL USE PEER USE GLOBAL NO RSVP FOR PEER Specifies whether you want the selected peer to use RSVP If you select e USE PEER you can modify the parameters for the selected peer e USE GLOBAL the peer uses the values that you specified in the DLSw RSVP Global Parameters window e NO RSVP FOR PEER the peer does not use RSVP Accept the default USE GLOBAL or click on Values and choose a different option 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 5 1 19 RSVP Slots Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Peer IP Table gt DLSw RSVP All slots on the router Depends on the number of slots in the router Specifies the slots that can make RSVP reservations for this peer Click on the Values button Select the slots that you want to make RSVP reservations For example if you select slots 2 and 3 in a BLN then the value in the RSVP Slots field appears as 01100 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1
309. y for use by DLSw The RSVP function is only available for DLSw Version 2 0 unicast and RFC 2166 multicast connections it does not support RFC 1434 or 1795 connections DLSw traffic can be unidirectional meaning that most of the data flows one way and the bandwidth for the frames going in opposite directions does not need to be reserved RSVP allows you to have both unidirectional and bidirectional interactive session DLSw lt traffic Configuring DLSw RSVP Parameters To configure RSVP you define a sending and a receiving router The same router can be both a sender and a receiver The sending router specifies incoming bandwidth reservation the receiving router outgoing bandwidth reservation For both the sending and receiving routers you specify the following parameters e DLSw RSVP Support e RSVP Mode e Outgoing and Incoming Bandwidth e Outgoing and Incoming Burst Size You can specify global RSVP parameters which provide the default values for all peers and per peer configuration parameters RSVP lets you reserve more or less bandwidth during offpeak hours to allow more customization of the network You do this by specifying a nonpeak start and end time the days of the week on which you want the offpeak hours to occur and the amount of nonpeak outgoing and incoming bandwidth You can also specify bandwidth and burst size for backup peers For instructions on configuring RSVP see Chapter 4 Customizing DLSw Servic
310. you define in the DLSw default MAC peer IP table contains the IP address of a remote DLSw peer that can reach a target SNA system or application The target system or application has an associated token ring 802 5 MAC address which you also specify in the DLSw default MAC peer IP table entry 308622 14 00 Rev 00 A 65 Configuring DLSw Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Mac Address Mac Peer Ip Address Figure A 18 DLSw MAC Configuration Window MAC Address Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Default MAC gt Add None Any valid 48 bit MAC address expressed in hexadecimal notation Specifies the MAC address associated with the SNA system or application that you want to reach via DLSw services Type in hexadecimal format the MAC address associated with the remote SNA system or application that you want to reach via DLSw services 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 10 1 2 A 66 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter MAC Peer IP Address Path Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt Default MAC gt Add Default None Options Any valid 32 bit IP address in the form network host using dotted decimal notation Function Specifies the IP address of a remote DLSw peer that can reach the remote SNA system or application identified by the MAC address in the same default MAC peer IP table entry The router adds this IP address to th
311. ze Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt DLSw RSVP Global 0 0 to 2147483647 bytes Specifies the burst size amount in bytes for the incoming DLSw traffic to use in RSVP reservations for unconfigured peers or peers that will use global parameters during non peak hours Type a value in the range 1 to 2147483647 or accept the default 0 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 45 Non Peak Start Time Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt DLSw RSVP Global 0 0 to 2400 Specifies the start time of the non peak hours Type the start time in hhmm format where hh is hours and mm is minutes using the 24 hour clock For example typing 0820 specifies 8 20 a m and 2400 specifies 12 00 midnight The Non Peak Start Time parameter is disabled if the Non Peak Starting Days parameter is set to all Os 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 46 308622 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Non Peak End Time Configuration Manager gt Protocols gt DLSw gt DLSw RSVP Global 0 0 to 2400 Specifies the end time of the non peak hours Type the end time in hhmm format where hh is hours and mm is minutes using the 24 hour clock For example typing 0820 specifies 8 20 a m and 2400 specifies 12 00 midnight The Non Peak End Time parameter is disabled if the Non Peak Starting Days parameter is set to all Os 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 5 1 47 Note

Avaya Configuring DLSw Services User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents